+

US20140187774A1 - Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors - Google Patents

Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20140187774A1
US20140187774A1 US14/100,952 US201314100952A US2014187774A1 US 20140187774 A1 US20140187774 A1 US 20140187774A1 US 201314100952 A US201314100952 A US 201314100952A US 2014187774 A1 US2014187774 A1 US 2014187774A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
optionally substituted
aliphatic
independently
optionally
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/100,952
Inventor
Jean-Damien Charrier
Steven Durrant
David Kay
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US14/100,952 priority Critical patent/US20140187774A1/en
Assigned to VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED reassignment VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CHARRIER, JEAN-DAMIEN, DURRANT, STEVEN, KAY, DAVID
Publication of US20140187774A1 publication Critical patent/US20140187774A1/en
Assigned to MACQUARIE US TRADING LLC reassignment MACQUARIE US TRADING LLC SECURITY INTEREST Assignors: VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS (SAN DIEGO) LLC, VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED
Assigned to VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED, VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS (SAN DIEGO) LLC reassignment VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MACQUARIE US TRADING LLC
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D487/14—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Definitions

  • Protein kinases constitute a large family of structurally related enzymes that are responsible for the control of a variety of signal transduction processes within the cell (see Hardie, G and Hanks, S. The Protein Kinase Facts Book, I and II, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif.: 1995). Protein kinases are thought to have evolved from a common ancestral gene due to the conservation of their structure and catalytic function. Almost all kinases contain a similar 250-300 amino acid catalytic domain. The kinases may be categorized into families by the substrates they phosphorylate (e.g., protein-tyrosine, protein-serine/threonine, lipids etc).
  • protein kinases mediate intracellular signaling by effecting a phosphoryl transfer from a nucleoside triphosphate to a protein acceptor that is involved in a signaling pathway. These phosphorylation events act as molecular on/off switches that can modulate or regulate the target protein biological function. These phosphorylation events are ultimately triggered in response to a variety of extracellular and other stimuli.
  • Examples of such stimuli include environmental and chemical stress signals (e.g., shock, heat shock, ultraviolet radiation, bacterial endotoxin, and H 2 O 2 ), cytokines (e.g., interleukin-1 (IL-1) and tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF-a), and growth factors (e.g., granulocyte macrophage-colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF), and fibroblast growth factor (FGF)).
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • TNF-a tumor necrosis factor alpha
  • growth factors e.g., granulocyte macrophage-colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF), and fibroblast growth factor (FGF)
  • An extracellular stimulus may affect one or more cellular responses related to cell growth, migration, differentiation, secretion of hormones, activation of transcription factors, muscle contraction, glucose metabolism, control of protein synthesis, survival and regulation of the cell cycle.
  • diseases are associated with abnormal cellular responses triggered by protein kinase-mediated events as described above. These diseases include, but are not limited to, cancer, autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, bone diseases, metabolic diseases, neurological and neurodegenerative diseases, cardiovascular diseases, allergies and asthma, Alzheimer's disease and hormone related diseases. Accordingly, there has been a substantial effort in medicinal chemistry to find protein kinase inhibitors that are effective as therapeutic agents.
  • the Polo-like kinases belong to a family of serine/threonine kinases that are highly conserved across the species, ranging from yeast to man (reviewed in Lowery D M et al., Oncogene 2005, 24; 248-259).
  • the Plk kinases have multiple roles in cell cycle, including control of entry into and progression through mitosis.
  • Plk1 is the best characterized of the Plk family members. Plk1 is widely expressed and is most abundant in tissues with a high mitotic index. Protein levels of Plk1 rise and peak in mitosis (Hamanaka, R et al., J Biol Chem 1995, 270, 21086-21091).
  • the reported substrates of Plk1 are all molecules that are known to regulate entry and progression through mitosis, and include CDC25C, cyclin B, p53, APC, BRCA2 and the proteasome. Plk1 is upregulated in multiple cancer types and the expression levels correlate with severity of disease (Macmillan, J C et al., Ann Surg Oncol 2001, 8, 729-740). Plk1 is an oncogene and can transform NIH-3T3 cells (Smith, M R et al., Biochem Biophys Res Commun 1997, 234, 397-405).
  • Plk1 Depletion or inhibition of Plk1 by siRNA, antisense, microinjection of antibodies, or transfection of a dominant negative construct of Plk1 into cells, reduces proliferation and viability of tumour cells in vitro (Guan, R et al., Cancer Res 2005, 65, 2698-2704; Liu, X et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 2003, 100, 5789-5794, Fan, Y et al., World J Gastroenterol 2005, 11, 4596-4599; Lane, H A et al., J Cell Biol 1996, 135, 1701-1713).
  • Plk1 Tumour cells that have been depleted of Plk1 have activated spindle checkpoints and defects in spindle formation, chromosome alignment and separation and cytokinesis. Loss in viability has been reported to be the result of an induction of apoptosis. In contrast, normal cells have been reported to maintain viability on depletion of Plk1. In vivo knock down of Plk1 by siRNA or the use of dominant negative constructs leads to growth inhibition or regression of tumours in xenograft models.
  • Plk2 is mainly expressed during the G1 phase of the cell cycle and is localized to the centrosome in interphase cells.
  • Plk2 knockout mice develop normally, are fertile and have normal survival rates, but are around 20% smaller than wild type mice. Cells from knockout animals progress through the cell cycle more slowly than in normal mice (Ma, S et al., Mol Cell Biol 2003, 23, 6936-6943). Depletion of Plk2 by siRNA or transfection of kinase inactive mutants into cells blocks centriole duplication. Downregulation of Plk2 also sensitizes tumour cells to taxol and promotes mitotic catastrophe, in part by suppression of the p53 response (Burns T F et al., Mol Cell Biol 2003, 23, 5556-5571).
  • Plk3 is expressed throughout the cell cycle and increases from G1 to mitosis. Expression is upregulated in highly proliferating ovarian tumours and breast cancer and is associated with a worse prognosis (Weichert, W et al., Br J Cancer 2004, 90, 815-821; Weichert, W et al., Virchows Arch 2005, 446, 442-450).
  • Plk3 In addition to regulation of mitosis, Plk3 is believed to be involved in Golgi fragmentation during the cell cycle and in the DNA-damage response Inhibition of Plk3 by dominant negative expression is reported to promote p53-independent apoptosis after DNA damage and suppresses colony formation by tumour cells (Li, Z et al., J Biol Chem 2005, 280, 16843-16850.
  • Plk4 is structurally more diverse from the other Plk family members. Depletion of this kinase causes apoptosis in cancer cells (Li, J et al., Neoplasia 2005, 7, 312-323). Plk4 knockout mice arrest at E7.5 with a high fraction of cells in mitosis and partly segregated chromosomes (Hudson, J W et al., Current Biology 2001, 11, 441-446).
  • the present invention generally relates to a method of preparing a compound represented by Structural Formula (I):
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR—, —S—, —S(O)—, or —S(O) 2 —;
  • R 1 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R 1 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 1 ;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, C 1-6 aliphatic, or C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloaliphatic groups represented by R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 , respectively, is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , and J 5 , respectively;
  • R 2 and R 3 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • R 3 and R 4 together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • R 4 and R 5 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • R 6 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R 6 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 6 ;
  • R 7 is —H, or a C 1-6 aliphatic or C 3-8 cycloaliphatic group optionally substituted with one or more instanced of J A , or, optionally R 7 , together with R 1 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring that is optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • R 8 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, or C 3-8 cycloaliphatic, wherein said aliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A , and wherein said cycloaliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • each J 1 is independently T or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T;
  • each of J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , and J 6 is independently M, or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M;
  • each T is independently halogen, oxo, —NO 2 , —CN, Q 1 , —Z 1 —H, or —Z 2 -Q 2 ;
  • each Z 1 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C( ⁇ NR)—, —C( ⁇ NOR)—, and —SO 2 N(R)—;
  • each Z 2 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C( ⁇ NR)—, —C( ⁇ NOR)—, —S(O)—, and —S(O) 2 —;
  • each Q 1 is independently C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each Q 1 is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of J Q ;
  • each Q 2 is independently C 1-6 aliphatic, C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, or Q 1 -Q 1 , each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J Q ; or each Q 2 , together with R and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • each J Q is independently M or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M;
  • each M is independently halogen, oxo, —NO 2 , —CN, —OR′, —SR′, —N(R′) 2 , —COR′, —CO 2 R′, —CONR′ 2 , —OCOR′′, —OCON(R′) 2 , —NRCOR′, —NRCO 2 R′, —NRCON(R′) 2 , —S(O)R′′, —SO 2 R′′, —SO 2 N(R′) 2 , —NRSO 2 R′′, —NRSO 2 N(R′) 2 , C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each of said cycloaliphatic, heterocyclyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups represented by M is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • each R is independently —H or C 1-6 aliphatic, or each R, together with Q 2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • each R′ is independently —H or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A ; or two R′ groups, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B ;
  • each R′′ is independently C 1-4 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A ;
  • each J A is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 3-7 cycloalkyl, and C 3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl);
  • each J B is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and C 1 -C 4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A ; and
  • q 0 or 1.
  • the method comprises the step of: a) cyclizing a compound represented by Structural Formula A:
  • R 10 is LG 1 or —X 1 R 1 , and LG 1 is a suitable leaving group; and b) optionally, when R 10 of Structural Formula (B) is LG 1 , further comprising the step of replacing the -LG 1 with —X 1 R 1 to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • the compounds represented by Structural Formula (I) can inhibit protein kinases, such as Plk kinases (e.g., Plk1, Plk2, Plk3 and/or Plk4). See, for example, US 2009/0062292.
  • Plk kinases e.g., Plk1, Plk2, Plk3 and/or Plk4.
  • the present invention can provide efficient synthetic methods with relatively high yields and/or relatively less steps for preparing such compounds that are useful as protein kinases inhibitors, particularly Plk inhibitors.
  • the methods of the invention employ the step of: a) cyclisating a compound represented by Structural Formula A:
  • R 10 is LG 1 or —X 1 R 1 , and LG 1 is a suitable leaving group. If R 10 is LG 1 in Structural Formula (B), the method optionally further includes the step of: b) replacing -LG 1 of Structural Formula (B) with —X 1 (R 1 ) under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • the reductive cyclisation is performed by the use of Zn powder in acetic acid (Zn/AcOH) or by the use of Fe powder in acetic acid (Fe/AcOH).
  • LG 1 Any suitable leaving group known in the art can be employed in the invention for LG 1 .
  • One suitable example of LG 1 is halogen, such as —Cl, —Br, or —I.
  • Other suitable examples of LG 1 include triflate (—OSO 2 CF 3 ), tosylate (O-(p-toluenesulfonyl)), mesylate (—OSO 2 (CH 3 )), lower alkyl sulfones, such as methylsulfone (—SO 2 Me), etc.
  • LG 1 is —Cl.
  • the —X 1 R 1 moiety of R 10 can be introduced at any suitable point during the synthesis of a compound of Structural Formula (I), for example, prior to or after the reductive cyclisation step a). In one embodiment, the —X 1 R 1 introduction is performed after the reductive cyclisation step a).
  • R 10 in Structural Formulae (A) and (B) is -LG 1 (see Compounds (1a) and (1b) in Scheme 1). As shown in Scheme 1, Compound (1a) undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to form Compound (1b). The -LG 1 leaving group of Compound (1b) is then replaced with —X 1 R 1 after the cyclisation step a).
  • the —X 1 R 1 introduction is performed prior to the reductive cyclisation step a).
  • the -LG 1 leaving group of Compound (1a) is replaced with —X 1 R 1 prior to the reductive cyclisation step a) to form Compound (1c).
  • Compound (1c) then undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to produce a compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • the —X 1 R 1 group can be introduced during the synthesis of the compounds represented by Structural Formula (A).
  • the —X 1 R 1 group can replace -LG 1 in a variety of ways known to one skilled in the art depending upon the values of X 1 .
  • HX 1 R 1 can displace -LG 1 in the presence of suitable base or acid, solvent and conditions. Suitable displacement reactions are known to one skilled in the art and can be found in a variety of resources, including “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry.”
  • a sulfur linker (wherein X 1 is —S—) can be oxidized under suitable oxidation conditions to form compounds wherein X 1 is —S(O)— or —S(O) 2 —.
  • Compounds of Structural Formula (I), wherein X 1 is a bond and R 1 is bonded to X 1 via a carbon atom can be formed under suitable cross-coupling conditions.
  • one of the starting materials is R 1 bonded to a cross-coupling group.
  • This starting material can react with, for example, the compounds of Structural Formula (B) wherein R 10 -LG 1 under suitable cross coupling conditions to form compounds of Structural Formula (I), wherein X 1 is a bond and R 1 is bonded to X 1 via a carbon atom.
  • cross-coupling reaction refers to a reaction in which a carbon-carbon bond is formed with the aid of a metal catalyst. Usually, one of the carbon atoms is bonded to a functional group (a “cross-coupling group”) while the other carbon atom is bonded to a halogen. Examples of cross coupling reactions include, but are not limited to, Suzuki couplings, Stille couplings, and Negishi couplings.
  • cross-coupling group refers to a functional group capable of reacting with another functional group (e.g., halo) in a cross coupling reaction to form a carbon-carbon (“C—C”) bond.
  • C—C carbon-carbon
  • the C—C bond is formed between two aromatic groups.
  • cross coupling condition refers to the chemical conditions (e.g., temperature, length of time of reaction, volume of solvent required) required in order to enable the cross coupling reaction to occur.
  • cross-coupling groups and their respective cross-coupling conditions include, but are not limited to, boronic acids and boronic esters with Suzuki coupling conditions, SnBu 3 (Bu: butyl) with Stille coupling conditions, and ZnX (X: halogen) with Negishi coupling conditions.
  • Suzuki coupling conditions involve the use of a palladium catalyst and a suitable solvent.
  • suitable palladium catalysts include, but are not limited to, PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 , Pd(Ph 3 ) 4 , and PdCl 2 (dppf) (wherein each Ph is phenyl, and dppf is 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene).
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, K 2 CO 3 and Na 2 CO 3 .
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, and ethanol.
  • Stille coupling conditions involve the use of a catalyst (usually palladium, but sometimes nickel), a suitable solvent, and other optional reagents.
  • a catalyst usually palladium, but sometimes nickel
  • suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, and dimethylformamide.
  • Negishi coupling conditions involve the use of a catalyst (palladium or nickel) and a suitable solvent.
  • a catalyst palladium or nickel
  • suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to Pd 2 (dba) 3 , Ni(PPh 3 ) 2 Cl 2 , PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 , and Pd(Ph 3 ) 4 (where “dba” is tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium).
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, and dimethylformamide
  • cross-coupling groups are formed from coupling group precursors.
  • a coupling group precursor is a reagent or group of reagents used to form a cross-coupling group. Examples include, but are not limited to, bis(pinacolato)diborane for the formation of boronate esters, trimethylborates for the formation of boronic acids, Bu 3 SnCl for the formation of stannanes, and ZnCl 2 for the formation zincates in Negishi coupling reactions.
  • suitable coupling group formation conditions include, but are not limited to, making boronic esters via palladium-mediated catalysis; making boronic acids by hydrolyzing boronic esters; making stannanes via a two step process: 1) halogen metal exchange followed by 2) transmetallation with Bu 3 SnCl and making zincates via a two step process: 1) halogen metal exchange followed by 2) addition of ZnCl 2 .
  • X 1 is —NR 7 —.
  • the replacement reaction between the -LG 1 group of Compounds (1a) and (1b) with —NR 1 R 7 can be done via, for example, reacting Compounds (1a) and (1b) with HNR 1 R 7 , respectively, to form respective Compounds (2c) and (2d).
  • the introduction of —NR 1 R 7 is performed prior to the reductive cyclisation step a).
  • Compound (1a) reacts with HNR 1 R 7 to form Compound (2c).
  • Compound (2c) then further undergoes the cyclisation step a) to form compound (2d), a compound of Structural Formula (I).
  • X 1 is —NR 7 —; and the —NR 1 R 7 introduction is performed after the reductive cyclisation step a).
  • Compound (1a) undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to form Compound (1b).
  • the -LG 1 leaving group of Compound (1b) is then replaced with —NR 1 R 7 via reacting Compound (1b) with HNR 1 R 7 to form compound (2d), a compound of Structural Formula (I).
  • the compounds of Structural Formula (A) can be prepared by any suitable method known in the art.
  • a compound of Structural Formula (A) can be prepared via reacting a compound of Structural Formula (D):
  • LG 2 in Structural Formula (E) is a suitable leaving group.
  • Steps C (when R 6 is —H) and H (R 6 is other then —H), respectively, can go through by the aid of a base, such as potassium carbonate, in a suitable organic solvent system.
  • a base such as potassium carbonate
  • suitable solvents for this reaction include DCM (dichloromethane), THF (tetrahydrofuran), petroleum ether, acetone, and mixtures thereof.
  • a compound of Structural formula (D) is suspended in a mixture of DCM (dichloromethane) and THF (tetrahydrofuran), and into this suspension is added a base, such as potassium carbonate.
  • a base such as potassium carbonate.
  • a compound of Structural Formula (E) is then added into the resulting mixture.
  • a mixture of a compound of Structural Formulae (D) and (E) is heated in the presence of a base, such as potassium carbonate, in a polar organic solvent, such as acetone.
  • LG 2 Any suitable leaving group known in the art can be employed in the invention for LG 2 .
  • One suitable example of LG 2 is halogen, such as —Cl, —Br, or —I.
  • Other suitable examples of LG 1 include triflate (—OSO 2 CF 3 ), tosylate (O-(p-toluenesulfonyl)), mesylate (—OSO 2 (CH 3 )), lower alkyl sulfones, such as methylsulfone (—SO 2 Me), etc.
  • LG 2 is —Cl.
  • the compounds of Structural Formula (D) can be prepared by any suitable method known in the art, for example, Barrett, et al., Bioorganic & Medical Chemistry Letters, 2004, 14(10), 2543-2546.
  • the compounds of Structural Formula (D) are prepared by reacting Compound (4a) with a hydrazide (e.g., formohydrazide, acetohydrazide, isobutyrohydrazide, etc.: Step A) followed by de-protection of the amine protecting group “Proc” of Compound (4b) (Step B), as shown in Scheme 4.
  • the “Proc” group in each of Compounds (4a) and (4b) is a suitable amine protecting group.
  • Any suitable amine protecting group known in the art can be employed in the invention. Suitable examples include Carbobenzyloxy (Cbz), p-Methoxybenzyl carbonyl (Moz or MeOZ), tert-Butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), 9-Fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (FMOC), Benzyl (Bn), p-Methoxybenzyl (PMB), 3,4-Dimethoxybenzyl (DMPM), p-methoxyphenyl (PMP), Tosyl (Ts), etc. Any suitable condition known in the art, for example, those of Barrett, et al., can be employed for the hydrazide reaction and the deprotection steps. Exemplary conditions for these steps are depicted in Scheme 4, where CDI is N,N1-carbonyldiimidazole, DCM is dichloromethane, and TFA is teterafluoroacetic acid.
  • the non-hydrogen R 6 group can generally be introduced during the preparation of the compounds of Structural Formula (D) as discussed above.
  • the non-hydrogen R 6 group can be introduced after the cyclisation step a) as desired by reacting Compound (5a) with a suitable reagent known in the art as a source for the non-hydrogen R 6 group (e.g., R 6 Br, R 6 Cl, etc.) to form Compound (5b):
  • the compounds represented by Structural Formula (I), wherein X 1 is —NR 7 —, and R 6 is other than —H are prepared by the methods of the invention.
  • the methods comprise Steps A-F of Scheme 6.
  • the methods comprise Steps A, B, G, H, I and F of Scheme 7.
  • the methods comprise Steps A, B, G, H, J and K of Scheme 8.
  • each R 6 is other than —H.
  • Steps A and B are independently as those described above in Scheme 4 for the synthesis of the compounds of Structural Formula (D); Steps C and H are independently as those described above in Scheme 3; Steps D, I and K are independently as described above for the reductive cyclisation step a); Steps G and E are independently as described above for those in Schemes 4 and 5, respectively; and Steps F and J are independently as described above for the amination reaction of Compound (1b) with HNR 1 R 7 to form Compound (2d) in Scheme 2.
  • LG 1 and LG 2 are independently halogen, such as —Cl, —Br, or —I, in each of Schemes 6, 7 and 8.
  • LG 1 and LG 2 are both —Cl in each of Schemes 6, 7 and 8.
  • the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by Structural Formula (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described below.
  • the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, —S—, —S(O)—, or —S(O) 2 —. Specifically, X 1 is —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—. More specifically, X 1 is —NR 7 —.
  • R 1 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R 1 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 1 .
  • R 1 is optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted C 6-10 aryl or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted C 6-10 aryl or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl. More specifically, R 1 is optionally substituted phenyl or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl. More specifically, R 1 is optionally substituted phenyl.
  • Each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, C 1-6 aliphatic, or C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloaliphatic groups represented by R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 , respectively, is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , and J 5 , respectively.
  • R 2 and R 3 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • R 3 and R 4 together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • R 4 and R 5 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , R 3 and R 4 , and R 4 and R 5 , respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring.
  • each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl ring. More specifically, R 2 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; R 3 is C 1-3 alkyl; R 4 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; and R 5 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl.
  • R 2 and R 3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R 4 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; and R 5 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl. More specifically, R 2 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; R 3 is C 1-3 alkyl; R 4 is —H; and R 5 is —H. More specifically, R 2 and R 3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R 4 is —H; and R 5 is —H.
  • R 6 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R 6 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 6 .
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic. Specifically, R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl. Specifically, R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl. More specifically, R 6 is optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl. Even more specifically, R 6 is cyclopentyl.
  • R 7 is —H, or a C 1-6 aliphatic or C 3-8 cycloaliphatic group optionally substituted with one or more instanced of J A , or, optionally R 7 , together with R 1 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring that is optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • the heterocyclic ring formed with R 1 and R 7 is 5-6 membered.
  • R 7 is —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic. More specifically, R 7 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl. Even more specifically, R 7 is —H.
  • R 8 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, or C 3-8 cycloaliphatic, wherein said aliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A , and wherein said cycloaliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • R 8 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, or C 3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl).
  • R 8 is —H or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • R 8 is —H or optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl.
  • R 8 is —H, C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-6 haloalkyl.
  • R 8 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • Each J 1 is independently T or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T.
  • J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , and J 6 is independently M, or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M.
  • Each T is independently halogen, oxo, —NO 2 , —CN, Q 1 , —Z 1 —H, or —Z 2 -Q 2 .
  • each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R
  • each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • Each M is independently halogen, oxo, —NO 2 , —CN, —OR′, —SR′, —N(R′) 2 , —COR′, —CO 2 R′, —CONR′ 2 , —OCOR′′, —OCON(R′) 2 , —NRCOR′, —NRCO 2 R′, —NRCON(R′) 2 , —S(O)R′′, —SO 2 R′′, —SO 2 N(R′) 2 , —NRSO 2 R′′, —NRSO 2 N(R′) 2 , C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C 6-10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each of said cycloaliphatic, heterocyclyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups represented by M is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • Each Z 1 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups (e.g., up to four groups) independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C( ⁇ NR)—, —C( ⁇ NOR)—, and —SO 2 N(R)—.
  • each Z 1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —CO 2 —, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • Each Z 2 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C( ⁇ NR)—, —C( ⁇ NOR)—, —S(O)—, and —S(O) 2 —.
  • each Z 2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —CO 2 —, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —S(O) 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, —N(R)SO 2 —, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • Each Q 1 is independently C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each Q 1 is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of J Q .
  • each Q 1 is independently optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl.
  • each Q 1 is independently optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl.
  • Each Q 2 is independently C 1-6 aliphatic, C 3-10 cycloaliphatic, C 6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, or Q 1 -Q 1 , each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J Q ; or each Q 2 , together with R and the nitrogen atom to which is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • each Q 2 is independently optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, or each Q 2 , together with R and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring.
  • Each J Q is independently M or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M.
  • values of J Q for each of the C 3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, and 4-7 membered heterocyclyl groups represented by Q 1 independently include halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; C 1 -C 4 cyanoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl,
  • values of J Q for the C 1-6 aliphatic (e.g., C 1-6 alkyl) represented by Q 2 include halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • Values of J Q for each of the cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by Q 2 independently include halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; C 1 -C 4 cyanoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, and C 2 -C 4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each R is independently —H or C 1-6 aliphatic, or each R, together with Q 2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • the C 1-4 aliphatic group is C 1-4 alkyl.
  • each R is independently —H, —CH 3 or —CH 2 CH 3 , or each R, together with Q 2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • Each R′ is independently —H or C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A ; or two R′ groups, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of J B .
  • the C 1-4 aliphatic group is C 1-4 alkyl.
  • Each R′′ is independently C 1-4 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A .
  • the C 1-4 aliphatic group is C 1-4 alkyl.
  • Each J A is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 3-7 cycloalkyl, and C 3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl).
  • Each J B is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and C 1 -C 4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of J A .
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 , or —S—; and values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • a third set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • a fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 7 is —H or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • a fifth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 7 is —H or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • a sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 1 is optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 7 is —H or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • a seventh set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • a ninth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , R 3 and R 4 , and R 4 and R 5 , respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • a tenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , R 3 and R 4 , and R 4 and R 5 , respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 and R 7 are independently as described above in the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, or ninth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R 8 is —H or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • Each Z 1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO 2 —, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • Each Z 2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO 2 —, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —S(O) 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, —N(R)SO 2 —, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • a thirteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Each Z 1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO 2 —, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • Each Z 2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO 2 —, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —S(O) 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, —N(R)SO 2 —, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • a fourteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • a fifteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • a sixteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • R 7 is —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • a seventeenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR—, or —S—.
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 7 is —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • a eighteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • Each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , R 3 and R 4 , and R 4 and R 5 , respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 7 is —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • R 8 is —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • X 1 is a bond, —O—, —NR 7 —, or —S—.
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • Each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , R 3 and R 4 , and R 4 and R 5 , respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 7 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a twentieth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 7 is —H.
  • a twenty first set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl. Specifically, R 7 is —H.
  • a twenty second set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R 2 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl. Specifically, R 2 is —H.
  • R 8 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a twenty third set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • Each of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • R 8 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a twenty fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • R 2 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl;
  • R 3 is C 1-3 alkyl;
  • R 4 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; and
  • R 5 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; or ii) R 2 and R 3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring;
  • R 4 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; and
  • R 5 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • R 8 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a twenty fifth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 1 is C 1-4 alkyl substituted with Q 1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2
  • R 1 is C 6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —SQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • R 2 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; R 3 is C 1-3 alkyl; R 4 is —H; and R 5 is —H; or ii) R 2 and R 3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R 4 is —H; and R 5 is —H.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R 2 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • R 8 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a twenty sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 .
  • R 2 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl; R 3 is C 1-3 alkyl; R 4 is —H; and R 5 is —H; or ii) R 2 and R 3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R 4 is —H; and R 5 is —H.
  • R 6 is —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 is —H, or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • R 8 is —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a twenty seventh set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 7 is —H.
  • a twenty eighth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently as described above in the twenty sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R 6 is optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl
  • R 7 is —H.
  • a twenty ninth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is —O—, or —S—.
  • a thirtieth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X 1 is —NR 7 —.
  • a thirty first set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by Structural Formula (II) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (II) are as described below:
  • values, including specific values, of variables of Structural Formula (II) are independently as described above in any set of the first through twenty sixth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • a second set of variables of Structural Formula (II) is as follows:
  • R 6 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic, or C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of the C 1-6 aliphatic and C 3-7 cycloaliphatic groups is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J 6 .
  • a third set of variables of Structural Formula (II) is as follows:
  • R 1 is optionally substituted C 6-10 aryl or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Each Z 1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO 2 —, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • Each Z 2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO 2 —, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO 2 —, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO 2 —, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, —SO 2 N(R)—, —N(R)SO 2 —, or —N(R)SO 2 N(R)—.
  • Each Q 1 is independently optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl.
  • Each of R 2 and R 3 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, or C 1-6 aliphatic, or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the carbon atom(s) to which they are bound, independently form a C 3-7 cycloalkyl ring, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloalkyl ring is independently and optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 6 is —H, C 1-6 aliphatic or C 3-7 cycloaliphatic, each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl).
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by Structural Formula (III) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (III) are as described below:
  • values, including specific values, of variables of Structural Formula (III) are independently as described above in any set of the first through twenty sixth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • a third set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • Phenyl ring A is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C 1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T.
  • Each T is halogen, cyano, Q 1 , —N(R)H, —OH, —CO 2 H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO 2 N(R)H, —N(R)SO 2 N(R)H, —S(O) 2 Q 2 , —N(R)Q 2 , —OQ 2 , —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —N(O)N(R)Q 2 , —C(O)N
  • Q 1 is C 3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; C 1 -C 4 cyanoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, and C 2 -C 4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each Q 2 is independently C 1-6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7membered heterocyclyl, or each Q 2 , together with R, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted, 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; wherein said C 1-6 alkyl represented by Q 2 is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); and wherein each of said cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R 6 is optionally substituted —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • Phenyl ring A is substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of —C(O)N(R)H, —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , —CO 2 H, —CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)Q 2 , —N(R)CO 2 Q 2 , —OC(O)N(R)Q 2 , and —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q 2 ; and optionally further substituted with one or one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; C 1 -C 4 cyanoalky
  • Each Q 2 is independently C 1-6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7membered heterocyclyl, or each Q 2 , together with R, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted, 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; wherein said C 1-6 alkyl represented by Q 2 is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); and wherein each of said cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R 6 is optionally substituted —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a fifth set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • Phenyl ring A is substituted with —OC(O)Q 2 , —C(O)N(R)Q 2 , or —N(R)C(O)Q 2 , and optionally further substituted with one or one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl; C 1 -C 4 cyanoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 aminoalkyl, C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl, and C 2 -C 4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each Q 2 is independently C 1-6 alkyl, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7membered heterocyclyl, or each Q 2 , together with R, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted, 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; wherein said C 1-6 alkyl represented by Q 2 is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl); and wherein each of said cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R 2 and R 3 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R 6 is optionally substituted —H, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 and R 8 are independently —H or C 1-6 alkyl.
  • a sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • R 6 is C 5-6 cycloalkyl.
  • a seventh set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • R 2 is —H or C 1-3 alkyl, and R 3 is C 1-3 alkyl; or R 2 and R 3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C 3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R 6 is C 5-6 cycloalkyl.
  • the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by any one of the following structural formulae, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
  • the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by any one of the following structural formulae, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
  • the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compound represented by the following structural formula:
  • the methods of the invention further comprise the step of reacting a compound of Structural Formula (D):
  • the compounds prepared by a method of the invention are represented by Structural Formula (II), or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (II) are independently as described above in the first, second, or third set of varaibles of Structural Formula (II).
  • the method comprises: a) cyclizing a compound represented by StructuralFormula (A1):
  • R 10 is LG 1 or —NR 1 R 7 ; and LG 1 is a suitable leaving group; and b) optionally, when R 10 of Structural Formula (B1) is LG 1 , further comprising the step of replacing -LG 1 of Structural Formula (B1) with —NR 1 R 7 under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • R 10 of Structural Formula (A1) is -LG 1
  • the method comprises the step of replacing -LG 1 of Structural Formula (A1) with —NR 1 R 7 prior to the cyclisation step a) by reacting the compound represented by Structural Formula (A1) with HNR 1 R 7 under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (A1) having —NR 1 R 7 for R 10 .
  • the compound represented by Structural Formula (A1) having —NR 1 R 7 for R 10 then undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to form a compound represented by Structural Formula (B) wherein R 10 is —NR 1 R 7 , i.e., a compound represented by Structural Formula (II).
  • compounds of the invention may optionally be substituted with one or more substituents, such as illustrated generally below, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses, and species of the compounds described above.
  • substituents such as illustrated generally below, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses, and species of the compounds described above.
  • the phrase “optionally substituted” is used interchangeably with the phrase “substituted or unsubstituted.”
  • substituted refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent.
  • an optionally substituted group may have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group.
  • substituent When more than one position in a given structure can be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at each position. When the term “optionally substituted” precedes a list, said term refers to all of the subsequent substitutable groups in that list. If a substituent radical or structure is not identified or defined as “optionally substituted”, the substituent radical or structure is unsubstituted. For example, if X is optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl or phenyl; X may be either optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl.
  • up to refers to zero or any integer number that is equal or less than the number following the phrase.
  • up to 3 means any one of 0, 1, 2, and 3.
  • a specified number range of atoms includes any integer therein. For example, a group having from 1-4 atoms could have 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms.
  • substituents and combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • stable refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, specifically, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • a stable compound or chemically feasible compound is one that is not substantially altered when kept at a temperature of 40° C. or less, in the absence of moisture or other chemically reactive conditions, for at least a week. Only those choices and combinations of substituents that result in a stable structure are contemplated. Such choices and combinations will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art and may be determined without undue experimentation.
  • aliphatic or “aliphatic group”, as used herein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), or branched, hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation but is non-aromatic. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. Aliphatic groups may be linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl groups.
  • Specific examples include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, n-propyl, sec-butyl, vinyl, n-butenyl, ethynyl, and tert-butyl and acetylene.
  • alkyl as used herein means a saturated straight or branched chain hydrocarbon.
  • alkenyl as used herein means a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon comprising one or more double bonds.
  • alkynyl as used herein means a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon comprising one or more triple bonds.
  • Each of the “alkyl”, “alkenyl” or “alkynyl” as used herein can be optionally substituted as set forth below.
  • the “alkyl” is C 1 -C 6 alkyl or C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • the “alkenyl” is C 2 -C 6 alkenyl or C 2 -C 4 alkenyl.
  • the “alkynyl” is C 2 -C 6 alkynyl or C 2 -C 4 alkynyl.
  • cycloaliphatic refers to a non-aromatic carbon only containing ring system which can be saturated or contains one or more units of unsaturation, having three to fourteen ring carbon atoms. In some embodiments, the number of carbon atoms is 3 to 10. In other embodiments, the number of carbon atoms is 4 to 7. In yet other embodiments, the number of carbon atoms is 5 or 6.
  • the term includes monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic, fused, spiro or bridged carbocyclic ring systems.
  • the term also includes polycyclic ring systems in which the carbocyclic ring can be “fused” to one or more non-aromatic carbocyclic or heterocyclic rings or one or more aromatic rings or combination thereof, wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the carbocyclic ring.
  • “Fused” bicyclic ring systems comprise two rings which share two adjoining ring atoms.
  • Bridged bicyclic group comprise two rings which share three or four adjacent ring atoms.
  • Spiro bicyclic ring systems share one ring atom.
  • Examples of cycloaliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl groups. Specific examples include, but are not limited to, cyclohexyl, cyclopropenyl, and cyclobutyl.
  • heterocycle refers to a non-aromatic ring system which can be saturated or contain one or more units of unsaturation, having three to fourteen ring atoms in which one or more ring carbons is replaced by a heteroatom such as, N, S, or O and each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 members.
  • non-aromatic heterocyclic rings comprise up to three heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring.
  • non-aromatic heterocyclic rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring system.
  • non-aromatic heterocyclic rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N and O within the ring system.
  • the term includes monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic fused, spiro or bridged heterocyclic ring systems.
  • the term also includes polycyclic ring systems in which the heterocyclic ring can be fused to one or more non-aromatic carbocyclic or heterocyclic rings or one or more aromatic rings or combination thereof, wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the heterocyclic ring.
  • heterocycles include, but are not limited to, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, azepanyl, diazepanyl, triazepanyl, azocanyl, diazocanyl, triazocanyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, oxazocanyl, oxazepanyl, thiazepanyl, thiazocanyl, benzimidazolonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, morpholino, including, for example, 3-morpholino, 4-morpholino, 2-thiomorpholino, 3-thiomorpholino, 4-thiomorpholino, 1-pyrrolidin
  • aryl (or “aryl ring” or “aryl group”) used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl”, “aralkoxy”, “aryloxyalkyl”, or “heteroaryl” refers to carbocyclic aromatic ring systems.
  • aryl may be used interchangeably with the terms “aryl ring” or “aryl group”.
  • Carbocyclic aromatic ring” groups have only carbon ring atoms (typically six to fourteen) and include monocyclic aromatic rings such as phenyl and fused polycyclic aromatic ring systems in which two or more carbocyclic aromatic rings are fused to one another.
  • Examples include 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 1-anthracyl and 2-anthracyl.
  • carbocyclic aromatic ring or “carbocyclic aromatic”, as it is used herein, is a group in which an aromatic ring is “fused” to one or more non-aromatic rings (carbocyclic or heterocyclic), such as in an indanyl, phthalimidyl, naphthimidyl, phenanthridinyl, or tetrahydronaphthyl, where the radical or point of attachment is on the aromatic ring.
  • heteroaryl refers to heteroaromatic ring groups having five to fourteen members, in which one or more ring carbons is replaced by a heteroatom such as, N, S, or O.
  • heteroaryl rings comprise up to three heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring.
  • heteroaryl rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring system.
  • heteroaryl rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N and O within the ring system.
  • Heteroaryl rings include monocyclic heteroaromatic rings and polycyclic aromatic rings in which a monocyclic aromatic ring is fused to one or more other aromatic rings.
  • Bicyclic 6,5 heteroaromatic ring as used herein, for example, is a six membered heteroaromatic ring fused to a second five membered ring, wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the six membered ring.
  • heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, imidazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl or thiadiazolyl including, for example, 2-furanyl, 3-furanyl, N-imidazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, 5-imidazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-oxadiazolyl, 5-oxadiazolyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 4-pyrazolyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridi
  • cyclo As used herein, “cyclo”, “cyclic”, “cyclic group” or “cyclic moiety”, include mono-, bi-, and tri-cyclic ring systems including cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which has been previously defined.
  • a “bicyclic ring system” includes 8-12 (e.g., 9, 10, or 11) membered structures that form two rings, wherein the two rings have at least one atom in common (e.g., 2 atoms in common).
  • Bicyclic ring systems include bicycloaliphatics (e.g., bicycloalkyl or bicycloalkenyl), bicycloheteroaliphatics, bicyclic aryls, and bicyclic heteroaryls.
  • bridged bicyclic ring system refers to a bicyclic heterocycloalipahtic ring system or bicyclic cycloaliphatic ring system in which the rings are bridged.
  • bridged bicyclic ring systems include, but are not limited to, adamantanyl, norbornanyl, bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, bicyclo[3.3.1]nonyl, bicyclo[3.2.3]nonyl, 2-oxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 1-aza-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 3-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, and 2,6-dioxa-tricyclo[3.3.1.03,7]nonyl.
  • a bridged bicyclic ring system can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as alkyl (including carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, and haloalkyl such as trifluoromethyl), alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, heterocycloalkyl, (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, cycloalkyloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, heteroaralkyloxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, nitro, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonylamino, cycloalkylcarbonylamino, (cycloalkylalkyl)carbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, aralkylcarbonylamino, (heter
  • bridge refers to a bond or an atom or an unbranched chain of atoms connecting two different parts of a molecule.
  • the two atoms that are connected through the bridge (usually but not always, two tertiary carbon atoms) are denotated as “bridgeheads”.
  • spiro refers to ring systems having one atom (usually a quaternary carbon) as the only common atom between two rings.
  • ring atom is an atom such as C, N, O or S that is in the ring of an aromatic group, cycloalkyl group or non-aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • a “substitutable ring atom” in an aromatic group is a ring carbon or nitrogen atom bonded to a hydrogen atom.
  • the hydrogen can be optionally replaced with a suitable substituent group.
  • substituted ring atom does not include ring nitrogen or carbon atoms which are shared when two rings are fused.
  • substituted ring atom does not include ring carbon or nitrogen atoms when the structure depicts that they are already attached to a moiety other than hydrogen.
  • heteroatom means one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon (including, any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or silicon; the quaternized form of any basic nitrogen or; a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR + (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl)).
  • an optionally substituted aralkyl can be substituted on both the alkyl and the aryl portion. Unless otherwise indicated as used herein optionally substituted aralkyl is optionally substituted on the aryl portion.
  • an aliphatic group and a heterocyclic ring may independently contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the saturated carbon of an aliphatic group or of a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring are selected from those described above, for example, in the definition of J A and J B .
  • Suitable substitutents include those listed as suitable for the unsaturated carbon of an aryl or heteroaryl group and additionally include the following: ⁇ O, ⁇ S, ⁇ NNHR*, ⁇ NN(R*) 2 , ⁇ NNHC(O)R*, ⁇ NNHCO 2 (alkyl), ⁇ NNHSO 2 (alkyl), or ⁇ NR*, wherein each R* is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic.
  • Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R* are selected from NH 2 , NH(C 1-4 aliphatic), N(C 1-4 aliphatic) 2 , halogen, C 1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C 1-4 aliphatic), NO 2 , CN, CO 2 H, CO 2 (C 1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C 1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C 1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C 1-4 aliphatic groups of R* is unsubstituted.
  • optional substituents on the nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring include those described above.
  • suitable substituents include —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and C 1 -C 4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 )
  • R + is hydrogen, an optionally substituted C 1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted —O(Ph), optionally substituted —CH 2 (Ph), optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) 2 (Ph); optionally substituted —CH ⁇ CH(Ph); or an unsubstituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring having one to four heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur
  • Optional substituents on the aliphatic group or the phenyl ring of R + are selected from NH 2 , NH(C 1-4 aliphatic), N(C 1-4 aliphatic) 2 , halogen, C 1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C 1-4 aliphatic), NO 2 , CN, CO 2 H, CO 2 (C 1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C 1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C 1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C 1-4 aliphatic groups of R + is unsubstituted.
  • an aryl (including aralkyl, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl and the like) or heteroaryl (including heteroaralkyl and heteroarylalkoxy and the like) group may contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the unsaturated carbon atom of an aryl or heteroaryl group are selected from those described above.
  • halogen —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and C 1 -C 4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —OCO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —CO 2 H, —CO 2 (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O
  • substituents include: halogen; —R o ; —OR o ; —SR o ; 1,2-methylenedioxy; 1,2-ethylenedioxy; phenyl (Ph) optionally substituted with R o ; —O(Ph) optionally substituted with R o ; —(CH 2 ) 1-2 (Ph), optionally substituted with R o ; —CH ⁇ CH(Ph), optionally substituted with R o ; —NO 2 ; —CN; —N(R o ) 2 ; —NR o C(O)R o ; —NR o C(S)R o ; —NR o C(O)N(R o ) 2 ; —NR o C(S)N(R o ) 2 ; —NR o CO 2 R o ; —NR o NR o C(O)R o ; —NR o NR o C(O)N(
  • Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R o are selected from NH 2 , NH(C 1-4 aliphatic), N(C 1-4 aliphatic) 2 , halogen, C 1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C 1-4 aliphatic), NO 2 , CN, CO 2 H, CO 2 (C 1-4 aliphatic), O(haloC 1-4 aliphatic), or haloC 1-4 aliphatic, CHO, N(CO)(C 1-4 aliphatic), C(O)N(C 1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C 1-4 aliphatic groups of R o is unsubstituted.
  • Non-aromatic nitrogen containing heterocyclic rings that are substituted on a ring nitrogen and attached to the remainder of the molecule at a ring carbon atom are said to be N substituted.
  • an N alkyl piperidinyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule at the two, three or four position of the piperidinyl ring and substituted at the ring nitrogen with an alkyl group.
  • Non-aromatic nitrogen containing heterocyclic rings such as pyrazinyl that are substituted on a ring nitrogen and attached to the remainder of the molecule at a second ring nitrogen atom are said to be N′ substituted-N-heterocycles.
  • an N′ acyl N-pyrazinyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule at one ring nitrogen atom and substituted at the second ring nitrogen atom with an acyl group.
  • unsaturated means that a moiety has one or more units of unsaturation.
  • two independent occurrences of R o may be taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound to form a 5-8-membered heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring or a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl ring.
  • Exemplary rings that are formed when two independent occurrences of R o (or R + , or any other variable similarly defined herein) are taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound include, but are not limited to the following: a) two independent occurrences of R o (or R + , or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to the same atom and are taken together with that atom to form a ring, for example N(R o ) 2 , where both occurrences of R o are taken together with the nitrogen atom to form a piperidin-1-yl, piperazin-1-yl, or morpholin-4-yl group; and b) two independent occurrences of R o (or R + , or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to different atoms and are taken together with both of those atoms to form a ring, for example where a phenyl group is substituted with two occurrences of
  • amino refers to —NH 2 .
  • hydroxyl or “hydroxy” or “alcohol moiety” refers to —OH.
  • an “oxo” refers to ⁇ O.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the molecule through an oxygen (“alkoxy” e.g., —O-alkyl) or sulfur (“alkylthio” e.g., —S-alkyl) atom.
  • halogen means F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • cyano or “nitrile” refer to —CN or —C ⁇ N.
  • alkoxyalkyl alkoxyalkenyl
  • alkoxyaliphatic alkoxyalkoxy
  • haloalkyl mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
  • This term includes perfluorinated alkyl groups, such as —CF 3 and —CF 2 CF 3 .
  • cyanoalkyl mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more cyano groups.
  • the cyanoalkyl is (NC)-alkyl-.
  • aminoalkyl alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more amino groups, wherein the amino group is as defined above.
  • hydroxyalkyl means alkyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more —OH groups.
  • alkoxyalkyl means alkyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more alkoxy groups.
  • alkoxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group such as (alkyl-O)-alkyl-, wherein alkyl has been defined above.
  • a protecting group and “protective group” as used herein, are interchangeable and refer to an agent used to temporarily block one or more desired functional groups in a compound with multiple reactive sites.
  • a protecting group has one or more, or specifically all, of the following characteristics: a) is added selectively to a functional group in good yield to give a protected substrate that is b) stable to reactions occurring at one or more of the other reactive sites; and c) is selectively removable in good yield by reagents that do not attack the regenerated, deprotected functional group.
  • the reagents do not attack other reactive groups in the compound. In other cases, the reagents may also react with other reactive groups in the compound.
  • nitrogen protecting group refers to an agent used to temporarily block one or more desired nitrogen reactive sites in a multifunctional compound.
  • Preferred nitrogen protecting groups also possess the characteristics exemplified for a protecting group above, and certain exemplary nitrogen protecting groups are also detailed in Chapter 7 in Greene, T. W., Wuts, P. G in “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York: 1999, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • the term “displaceable moiety” or “leaving group” refers to a group that is associated with an aliphatic or aromatic group as defined herein and is subject to being displaced by nucleophilic attack by a nucleophile.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, cis-trans, conformational, and rotational) forms of the structure.
  • isomeric e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, cis-trans, conformational, and rotational
  • the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, (Z) and (E) double bond isomers, and (Z) and (E) conformational isomers are included in this invention, unless only one of the isomers is drawn specifically.
  • a substituent can freely rotate around any rotatable bonds.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13 C- or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.
  • Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays.
  • Such compounds, especially deuterium analogs can also be therapeutically useful.
  • the compounds of the invention are defined herein by their chemical structures and/or chemical names. Where a compound is referred to by both a chemical structure and a chemical name, and the chemical structure and chemical name conflict, the chemical structure is determinative of the compound's identity.
  • the compounds described herein can exist in free form, or, where appropriate, as salts. Those salts that are pharmaceutically acceptable are of particular interest since they are useful in administering the compounds described above for medical purposes. Salts that are not pharmaceutically acceptable are useful in manufacturing processes, for isolation and purification purposes, and in some instances, for use in separating stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention or intermediates thereof
  • the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to salts of a compound, which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in humans and lower animals without undue side effects, such as, toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds described herein include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds.
  • acid addition salts can be prepared by 1) reacting the purified compound in its free-base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid and 2) isolating the salt thus formed.
  • acid addition salts might be a more convenient form for use and use of the salt amounts to use of the free basic form.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, non-toxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid
  • organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, glycolate, gluconate, glycolate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, ox
  • base addition salts can be prepared by 1) reacting the purified compound in its acid form with a suitable organic or inorganic base and 2) isolating the salt thus formed.
  • base addition salt might be more convenient and use of the salt form inherently amounts to use of the free acid form.
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal (e.g., sodium, lithium, and potassium), alkaline earth metal (e.g., magnesium and calcium), ammonium and N + (C 1-4 alkyl) 4 salts.
  • This invention also envisions the quaternization of any basic nitrogen-containing groups of the compounds disclosed herein. Water or oil-soluble or dispersible products may be obtained by such quaternization.
  • Basic addition salts include pharmaceutically acceptable metal and amine salts.
  • Suitable metal salts include the sodium, potassium, calcium, barium, zinc, magnesium, and aluminium.
  • the sodium and potassium salts are usually preferred.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, lower alkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • Suitable inorganic base addition salts are prepared from metal bases which include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, aluminium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, zinc hydroxide and the like.
  • Suitable amine base addition salts are prepared from amines which are frequently used in medicinal chemistry because of their low toxicity and acceptability for medical use Ammonia, ethylenediamine, N-methyl-glucamine, lysine, arginine, ornithine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, dietanolamine, procaine, N-benzylphenethylamine, diethylamine, piperazine, tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, triethylamine, dibenzylamine, ephenamine, dehydroabietylamine, N-ethylpiperidine, benzylamine
  • acids and bases while not in themselves pharmaceutically acceptable, may be employed in the preparation of salts useful as intermediates in obtaining the compounds described herein and their pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base addition salts.
  • the methods of the invention can be employed for preparing pharmaceutically acceptable solvates (e.g., hydrates) and clathrates of these compounds.
  • solvate is a solvate formed from the association of one or more pharmaceutically acceptable solvent molecules to one of the compounds described herein.
  • solvate includes hydrates (e.g., hemihydrate, monohydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate, tetrahydrate, and the like).
  • hydrate means a compound described herein or a salt thereof that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.
  • clathrate means a compound described herein or a salt thereof in the form of a crystal lattice that contains spaces (e.g., channels) that have a guest molecule (e.g., a solvent or water) trapped within.
  • the methods of the invention can be employed for preparing pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives or prodrugs of these compounds.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative or prodrug” includes any pharmaceutically acceptable ester, salt of an ester, or other derivative or salt thereof, of a compound described herein, which, upon administration to a recipient, is capable of providing, either directly or indirectly, a compound described herein or an inhibitorily active metabolite or residue thereof.
  • Particularly favoured derivatives or prodrugs are those that increase the bioavailability of the compounds when such compounds are administered to a patient (e.g., by allowing an orally administered compound to be more readily absorbed into the blood) or which enhance delivery of the parent compound to a biological compartment (e.g., the brain or lymphatic system) relative to the parent species.
  • prodrug means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide a compound described herein.
  • Prodrugs may become active upon such reaction under biological conditions, or they may have activity in their unreacted forms.
  • Examples of prodrugs contemplated in this invention include, but are not limited to, analogs or derivatives of compounds of the invention that comprise biohydrolyzable moieties such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues.
  • prodrugs include derivatives of compounds described herein that comprise —NO, —NO 2 , —ONO, or —ONO 2 moieties.
  • Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by BURGER'S MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY AND DRUG DISCOVERY (1995) 172-178, 949-982 (Manfred E. Wolff ed., 5th ed).
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative” is an adduct or derivative which, upon administration to a patient in need, is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as otherwise described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives include, but are not limited to, esters and salts of such esters.
  • compositions described above include, without limitation, esters, amino acid esters, phosphate esters, metal salts and sulfonate esters.
  • the compounds described above are useful as protein kinase inhibitors, such as Plk (Plk1, Plk2, Plk3, and/or Plk4) inhibitors.
  • Plk protein kinase inhibitors
  • these compounds can inhibit the activity of such protein kinase(s) in a patient.
  • inhibiting such protein kinase activity can treat or prevent a condition selected from autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, proliferative and hyperproliferative diseases, immunologically-mediated diseases, bone diseases, metabolic diseases, neurological and neurodegenerative diseases, cardiovascular diseases, hormone related diseases, allergies, asthma, and Alzheimer's disease.
  • the compounds described above are useful for the treatment of diseases, disorders, and conditions characterized by excessive or abonormal cell proliferation.
  • diseases include a proliferative or hyperproliferative disease, and a neurodegenerative disease.
  • proliferative and hyperproliferative diseases include, without limitation, cancer.
  • cancer includes, but is not limited to, the following cancers: breast; ovary; cervix; prostate; testis, genitourinary tract; esophagus; larynx, glioblastoma; neuroblastoma; stomach; skin, keratoacanthoma; lung, epidermoid carcinoma, large cell carcinoma, small cell carcinoma, lung adenocarcinoma; bone; colon; colorectal; adenoma; pancreas, adenocarcinoma; thyroid, follicular carcinoma, undifferentiated carcinoma, papillary carcinoma; seminoma; melanoma; sarcoma; bladder carcinoma; liver carcinoma and biliary passages; kidney carcinoma; myeloid disorders; lymphoid disorders, Hodgkin's, hairy cells; buccal cavity and pharynx (oral), lip, tongue, mouth, pharynx; small intestine; colon-rectum, large intestine, rectum; brain
  • cancer includes, but is not limited to, the following cancers: myeloma, lymphoma, or a cancer selected from gastric, renal, or and the following cancers: head and neck, oropharangeal, non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), endometrial, hepatocarcinoma, Non-Hodgkins lymphoma, and pulmonary.
  • NSCLC non-small cell lung cancer
  • cancer also includes, but is not limited to, the following cancers: epidermoid Oral: buccal cavity, lip, tongue, mouth, pharynx; Cardiac: sarcoma (angiosarcoma, fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, liposarcoma), myxoma, rhabdomyoma, fibroma, lipoma and teratoma; Lung: bronchogenic carcinoma (squamous cell or epidermoid, undifferentiated small cell, undifferentiated large cell, adenocarcinoma), alveolar (bronchiolar) carcinoma, bronchial adenoma, sarcoma, lymphoma, chondromatous hamartoma, mesothelioma; Gastrointestinal: esophagus (squamous cell carcinoma, larynx, adenocarcinoma, leiomyosarcoma, lymphom
  • the compounds described above are useful for treating cancer, such as colorectal, thyroid, breast, and lung cancer; and myeloproliferative disorders, such as polycythemia vera, thrombocythemia, myeloid metaplasia with myelofibrosis, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia, hypereosinophilic syndrome, juvenile myelomonocytic leukemia, and systemic mast cell disease.
  • cancer such as colorectal, thyroid, breast, and lung cancer
  • myeloproliferative disorders such as polycythemia vera, thrombocythemia, myeloid metaplasia with myelofibrosis, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia, hypereosinophilic syndrome, juvenile myelomonocytic leukemia, and systemic mast cell disease.
  • diseases and conditions where the compounds described herein and their compositions are useful include hematopoietic disorders, in particular, acute-myelogenous leukemia (AML), chronic-myelogenous leukemia (CML), acute-promyelocytic leukemia (APL), and acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL).
  • AML acute-myelogenous leukemia
  • CML chronic-myelogenous leukemia
  • APL acute-promyelocytic leukemia
  • ALL acute lymphocytic leukemia
  • neurodegenerative diseases include, without limitation, Alzheimer's disease.
  • the compounds described above can be particularly useful for treating a protein-kinase mediated condition, such as a Plk-mediated disease.
  • protein kinase-mediated condition means any disease or other deleterious condition in which a protein kinase plays a role. Such conditions include, without limitation, autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, proliferative and hyperproliferative diseases, immunologically-mediated diseases, bone diseases, metabolic diseases, neurological and neurodegenerative diseases, cardiovascular diseases, hormone related diseases, allergies, asthma, and Alzheimer's disease.
  • Plk-mediated condition as used herein means any disease or other deleterious condition in which Plk plays a role. Such conditions include, without limitation, a proliferative or hyperproliferative disease, or a neurodegenerative disease.
  • a “patient” means an animal, preferably a human.
  • an “effective amount” of a compound for treating or preventing a protein kinase-mediated disease/condition is the amount effective in order to treat said disease/condition.
  • the compounds described above may be administered using any amount and any route of administration effective for treating or lessening the severity of said disease.
  • the compounds can be administered in a dosage of between 0.01-100 mg/kg body weight/day.
  • a specific dosage and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, and the judgment of the treating physician and the severity of the particular disease being treated.
  • the amount of the compound will also depend upon the particular compound in the composition.
  • additional drugs which are normally administered to treat or prevent that condition, may be administered together with the protease inhibitors described herein.
  • chemotherapeutic agents or other anti-proliferative agents may be combined with the protein kinase inhibitors of this invention to treat proliferative diseases.
  • those additional agents may be administered separately, as part of a multiple dosage regimen, from the protein kinase inhibitor-containing compound or composition.
  • those agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with the protein kinase inhibitor in a single composition.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, GleevecTM, adriamycin, dexamethasone, vincristine, cyclophosphamide, fluorouracil, topotecan, taxol, interferons, and platinum derivatives.
  • agents the inhibitors of this invention may also be combined with include, without limitation: treatments for Alzheimer's Disease such as Aricept® and Excelon®; treatments for Parkinson's Disease such as L-DOPA/carbidopa, entacapone, ropinrole, pramipexole, bromocriptine, pergolide, trihexephendyl, and amantadine; agents for treating Multiple Sclerosis (MS) such as beta interferon (e.g., Avonex® and Rebif®), Copaxone®, and mitoxantrone; treatments for asthma such as albuterol and Singulair®; agents for treating schizophrenia such as zyprexa, risperdal, seroquel, and haloperidol; anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive agents such as cyclosporin
  • biological sample means an in vitro or an ex vivo sample, including, without limitation, cell cultures or extracts thereof; biopsied material obtained from a mammal or extracts thereof; and blood, saliva, urine, feces, semen, tears, or other body fluids or extracts thereof
  • Inhibition of protein kinase activity in a biological sample is useful for a variety of purposes that are known to one of skill in the art. Examples of such purposes include, but are not limited to, blood transfusion, organ-transplantation, and biological specimen storage.
  • the compounds described above are also useful the study of protein kinases in biological and pathological phenomena; the study of intracellular signal transduction pathways mediated by such protein kinases; and the comparative evaluation of new protein kinase inhibitors.
  • uses include, but are not limited to, biological assays such as enzyme assays and cell-based assays.
  • the activity of the compounds as protein kinase inhibitors may be assayed in vitro, in vivo or in a cell line.
  • In vitro assays include assays that determine inhibition of either the kinase activity or ATPase activity of the activated kinase. Alternate in vitro assays quantitate the ability of the inhibitor to bind to the protein kinase and may be measured either by radiolabelling the inhibitor prior to binding, isolating the inhibitor/kinase complex and determining the amount of radiolabel bound, or by running a competition experiment where new inhibitors are incubated with the kinase bound to known radioligands. Protein kinase inhibition assays are known in the art. For example, detailed conditions for Plk1, Plk2, Plk3, and Plk4 are set forth in US 2008/0167289 and US 2009/0062292.
  • the compounds described above can be formulated in pharmaceutically acceptable formulations that optionally further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant or vehicle.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable compositions comprise a compound described above in an effective amount, and additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle, which includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle which includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired.
  • Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980) discloses various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutically acceptable compositions and known techniques for
  • any conventional carrier medium is incompatible with the compounds of the invention, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component(s) of the pharmaceutically acceptable composition
  • its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this invention.
  • side effects encompasses unwanted and adverse effects of a therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent). Side effects are always unwanted, but unwanted effects are not necessarily adverse. An adverse effect from a therapy (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agent) might be harmful or uncomfortable or risky.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may contain inert ingredients which do not unduly inhibit the biological activity of the compounds.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable carriers should be biocompatible, e.g., non-toxic, non-inflammatory, non-immunogenic or devoid of other undesired reactions or side-effects upon the administration to a subject. Standard pharmaceutical formulation techniques can be employed.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins (such as human serum albumin), buffer substances (such as twin 80, phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, or potassium sorbate), partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes (such as protamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, or zinc salts), colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, wool fat, sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate;
  • compositions thereof can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, as an oral or nasal spray, or the like, depending on the severity of the infection being treated.
  • parenteral as used herein includes, but is not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular, intra-synovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrahepatic, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques.
  • the compositions are administered orally, intraperitoneally or intravenously.
  • any orally acceptable dosage form including, but not limited to, capsules, tablets, aqueous suspensions or solutions, can be used for the oral administration.
  • carriers commonly used include, but are not limited to, lactose and corn starch.
  • Lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate, are also typically added.
  • useful diluents include lactose and dried cornstarch.
  • aqueous suspensions are required for oral use, the active ingredient is combined with emulsifying and suspending agents. If desired, certain sweetening, flavoring or coloring agents may also be added.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • the oral compositions can also include
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
  • the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and gly
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polethylene glycols and the like.
  • the active compounds can also be in microencapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art.
  • the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch.
  • Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose.
  • the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • buffering agents include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • Injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • Sterile injectable forms may be aqueous or oleaginous suspension. These suspensions may be formulated according to techniques known in the art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • Suitable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or di-glycerides.
  • Fatty acids, such as oleic acid and its glyceride derivatives are useful in the preparation of injectables, as are natural pharmaceutically-acceptable oils, such as olive oil or castor oil, especially in their polyoxyethylated versions.
  • oil solutions or suspensions may also contain a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant, such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similar dispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation of pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions and suspensions.
  • a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similar dispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation of pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions and suspensions.
  • Other commonly used surfactants such as Tweens, Spans and other emulsifying agents or bioavailability enhancers which are commonly used in the manufacture of pharmaceutically acceptable solid, liquid, or other dosage forms may also be used for the purposes of formulation.
  • the rate of compound release can be controlled.
  • biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).
  • Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the compound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are specifically suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the active compound with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches.
  • the active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.
  • Ophthalmic formulation, eardrops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • transdermal patches which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body, can also be used.
  • Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • compositions described above and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof may also be administered by nasal aerosol or inhalation.
  • Such compositions are prepared according to techniques well-known in the art of pharmaceutical formulation and may be prepared as solutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bioavailability, fluorocarbons, and/or other conventional solubilizing or dispersing agents.
  • unit dosage form refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosage for subjects undergoing treatment, with each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, optionally in association with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the unit dosage form can be for a single daily dose or one of multiple daily doses (e.g., about 1 to 4 or more times per day). When multiple daily doses are used, the unit dosage form can be the same or different for each dose.
  • the amount of the active compound in a unit dosage form will vary depending upon, for example, the host treated, and the particular mode of administration, for example, from 0.01 mg/kg body weight/day to 100 mg/kg body weight/day.
  • tert-butyl N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]carbamate (2.255 g, 9.923 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (17.76 mL) at 0° C. and TFA (17.76 mL) was added. The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 4.5 hours then concentrated under high vacuum. The residue was azeotroped with DCM ( ⁇ 2). The resultant oil was dissolved in a mixture of THF (40 ml) and DCM (20 ml) then treated with MP-carbonate (15 g, 199.9 mmol). The reaction was stirred gently for 1 hour then filtered.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

A method of preparing a compound represented by Structural Formula (I):
Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described in the specification and claims, comprises the step of:
  • a) cyclizing a compound represented by Structural Formula A:
Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00002
under suitable reductive cyclisation conditions to form a compound represented by Structural Formula B:
Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00003
wherein R10 is LG1 or —X1R1, and -LG1 is a suitable leaving group; and
  • b) optionally, when R10 of Structural Formula (B) is LG1, further comprising the step of replacing the -LG1 of Structural Formula (B) with —X1R1 to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I).

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/424,736, filed Mar. 20, 2012, which is a continuation of International Application No. PCT/US2010/050132, filed Sep. 24, 2010, which claims priority to U.S. Application No. 61/245,769, filed on Sep. 25, 2009. The entire contents of the aforementioned application are incorporated herein.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The search for new therapeutic agents has been greatly aided in recent years by a better understanding of the structure of enzymes and other biomolecules associated with diseases. One important class of enzymes that has been the subject of intensive study is protein kinases.
  • Protein kinases constitute a large family of structurally related enzymes that are responsible for the control of a variety of signal transduction processes within the cell (see Hardie, G and Hanks, S. The Protein Kinase Facts Book, I and II, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif.: 1995). Protein kinases are thought to have evolved from a common ancestral gene due to the conservation of their structure and catalytic function. Almost all kinases contain a similar 250-300 amino acid catalytic domain. The kinases may be categorized into families by the substrates they phosphorylate (e.g., protein-tyrosine, protein-serine/threonine, lipids etc). Sequence motifs have been identified that generally correspond to each of these kinase families (See, for example, Hanks, S. K., Hunter, T., FASEB J. 1995, 9, 576-596; Knighton et al., Science 1991, 253, 407-414; Hiles et al, Cell 1992, 70, 419-429; Kunz et al, Cell 1993, 73, 585-596; Garcia-Bustos et al, EMBO J 1994, 13, 2352-2361).
  • In general, protein kinases mediate intracellular signaling by effecting a phosphoryl transfer from a nucleoside triphosphate to a protein acceptor that is involved in a signaling pathway. These phosphorylation events act as molecular on/off switches that can modulate or regulate the target protein biological function. These phosphorylation events are ultimately triggered in response to a variety of extracellular and other stimuli. Examples of such stimuli include environmental and chemical stress signals (e.g., shock, heat shock, ultraviolet radiation, bacterial endotoxin, and H2O2), cytokines (e.g., interleukin-1 (IL-1) and tumor necrosis factor alpha (TNF-a), and growth factors (e.g., granulocyte macrophage-colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF), and fibroblast growth factor (FGF)). An extracellular stimulus may affect one or more cellular responses related to cell growth, migration, differentiation, secretion of hormones, activation of transcription factors, muscle contraction, glucose metabolism, control of protein synthesis, survival and regulation of the cell cycle.
  • Many diseases are associated with abnormal cellular responses triggered by protein kinase-mediated events as described above. These diseases include, but are not limited to, cancer, autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, bone diseases, metabolic diseases, neurological and neurodegenerative diseases, cardiovascular diseases, allergies and asthma, Alzheimer's disease and hormone related diseases. Accordingly, there has been a substantial effort in medicinal chemistry to find protein kinase inhibitors that are effective as therapeutic agents.
  • The Polo-like kinases (Plk) belong to a family of serine/threonine kinases that are highly conserved across the species, ranging from yeast to man (reviewed in Lowery D M et al., Oncogene 2005, 24; 248-259). The Plk kinases have multiple roles in cell cycle, including control of entry into and progression through mitosis. Plk1 is the best characterized of the Plk family members. Plk1 is widely expressed and is most abundant in tissues with a high mitotic index. Protein levels of Plk1 rise and peak in mitosis (Hamanaka, R et al., J Biol Chem 1995, 270, 21086-21091). The reported substrates of Plk1 are all molecules that are known to regulate entry and progression through mitosis, and include CDC25C, cyclin B, p53, APC, BRCA2 and the proteasome. Plk1 is upregulated in multiple cancer types and the expression levels correlate with severity of disease (Macmillan, J C et al., Ann Surg Oncol 2001, 8, 729-740). Plk1 is an oncogene and can transform NIH-3T3 cells (Smith, M R et al., Biochem Biophys Res Commun 1997, 234, 397-405). Depletion or inhibition of Plk1 by siRNA, antisense, microinjection of antibodies, or transfection of a dominant negative construct of Plk1 into cells, reduces proliferation and viability of tumour cells in vitro (Guan, R et al., Cancer Res 2005, 65, 2698-2704; Liu, X et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 2003, 100, 5789-5794, Fan, Y et al., World J Gastroenterol 2005, 11, 4596-4599; Lane, H A et al., J Cell Biol 1996, 135, 1701-1713). Tumour cells that have been depleted of Plk1 have activated spindle checkpoints and defects in spindle formation, chromosome alignment and separation and cytokinesis. Loss in viability has been reported to be the result of an induction of apoptosis. In contrast, normal cells have been reported to maintain viability on depletion of Plk1. In vivo knock down of Plk1 by siRNA or the use of dominant negative constructs leads to growth inhibition or regression of tumours in xenograft models.
  • Plk2 is mainly expressed during the G1 phase of the cell cycle and is localized to the centrosome in interphase cells. Plk2 knockout mice develop normally, are fertile and have normal survival rates, but are around 20% smaller than wild type mice. Cells from knockout animals progress through the cell cycle more slowly than in normal mice (Ma, S et al., Mol Cell Biol 2003, 23, 6936-6943). Depletion of Plk2 by siRNA or transfection of kinase inactive mutants into cells blocks centriole duplication. Downregulation of Plk2 also sensitizes tumour cells to taxol and promotes mitotic catastrophe, in part by suppression of the p53 response (Burns T F et al., Mol Cell Biol 2003, 23, 5556-5571).
  • Plk3 is expressed throughout the cell cycle and increases from G1 to mitosis. Expression is upregulated in highly proliferating ovarian tumours and breast cancer and is associated with a worse prognosis (Weichert, W et al., Br J Cancer 2004, 90, 815-821; Weichert, W et al., Virchows Arch 2005, 446, 442-450). In addition to regulation of mitosis, Plk3 is believed to be involved in Golgi fragmentation during the cell cycle and in the DNA-damage response Inhibition of Plk3 by dominant negative expression is reported to promote p53-independent apoptosis after DNA damage and suppresses colony formation by tumour cells (Li, Z et al., J Biol Chem 2005, 280, 16843-16850.
  • Plk4 is structurally more diverse from the other Plk family members. Depletion of this kinase causes apoptosis in cancer cells (Li, J et al., Neoplasia 2005, 7, 312-323). Plk4 knockout mice arrest at E7.5 with a high fraction of cells in mitosis and partly segregated chromosomes (Hudson, J W et al., Current Biology 2001, 11, 441-446).
  • Molecules of the protein kinase family have been implicated in tumour cell growth, proliferation and survival. Accordingly, there is a great need to develop compounds useful as inhibitors of protein kinases. The evidence implicating the Plk kinases as essential for cell division is strong. Blockade of the cell cycle is a clinically validated approach to inhibiting tumour cell proliferation and viability. A number of Plk kinase inhibitors have been reported in the art. See, for example, US 2009/0062292, US 2008/0167289, US 2006/004014, U.S. Pat. No. 6,806,272, U.S. Pat. No. 6,861,422, WO2009/040556, WO 2009/042711, and WO 2006/058876. Considering the potential of these Plk kinase inhibitors for treating one or more of the aforementioned diseases, it would be desirable to develop new efficient synthetic methods for such inhibitors and for their derivatives.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention generally relates to a method of preparing a compound represented by Structural Formula (I):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00004
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR—, —S—, —S(O)—, or —S(O)2—; R1 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R1 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J1;
  • each R2, R3, R4, and R5 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-10 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloaliphatic groups represented by R2, R3, R4, and R5, respectively, is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J2, J3, J4, and J5, respectively;
  • optionally, R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • optionally, R3 and R4, together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • optionally, R4 and R5, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • R6 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R6 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J6;
  • R7 is —H, or a C1-6 aliphatic or C3-8 cycloaliphatic group optionally substituted with one or more instanced of JA, or, optionally R7, together with R1 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring that is optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • R8 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-8 cycloaliphatic, wherein said aliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA, and wherein said cycloaliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • each J1 is independently T or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T;
  • each of J2, J3, J4, J5, and J6 is independently M, or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M;
  • each T is independently halogen, oxo, —NO2, —CN, Q1, —Z1—H, or —Z2-Q2;
  • each Z1 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(═NR)—, —C(═NOR)—, and —SO2N(R)—;
  • each Z2 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(═NR)—, —C(═NOR)—, —S(O)—, and —S(O)2—;
  • each Q1 is independently C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each Q1 is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JQ;
  • each Q2 is independently C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, or Q1-Q1, each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of JQ; or each Q2, together with R and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • each JQ is independently M or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M;
  • each M is independently halogen, oxo, —NO2, —CN, —OR′, —SR′, —N(R′)2, —COR′, —CO2R′, —CONR′2, —OCOR″, —OCON(R′)2, —NRCOR′, —NRCO2R′, —NRCON(R′)2, —S(O)R″, —SO2R″, —SO2N(R′)2, —NRSO2R″, —NRSO2N(R′)2, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each of said cycloaliphatic, heterocyclyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups represented by M is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • each R is independently —H or C1-6 aliphatic, or each R, together with Q2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • each R′ is independently —H or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA; or two R′ groups, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB;
  • each R″ is independently C1-4 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA;
  • each JA is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C3-7 cycloalkyl, and C3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl);
  • each JB is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), and C1-C4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA; and
  • q is 0 or 1.
  • The method comprises the step of:
    a) cyclizing a compound represented by Structural Formula A:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00005
  • under suitable reductive cyclisation conditions to form a compound represented by Structural Formula B:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00006
  • wherein R10 is LG1 or —X1R1, and LG1 is a suitable leaving group; and
    b) optionally, when R10 of Structural Formula (B) is LG1, further comprising the step of replacing the -LG1 with —X1R1 to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • The compounds represented by Structural Formula (I) can inhibit protein kinases, such as Plk kinases (e.g., Plk1, Plk2, Plk3 and/or Plk4). See, for example, US 2009/0062292. The present invention can provide efficient synthetic methods with relatively high yields and/or relatively less steps for preparing such compounds that are useful as protein kinases inhibitors, particularly Plk inhibitors.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The methods of the invention employ oxadiazole intermediates for preparing the compounds of Structural Formula (I). Certain aspects of the methods of the invention are depicted below in schemes and preparative examples that follow. Unless otherwise indicated, all variables in the following schemes are as defined herein.
  • The methods of the invention employ the step of: a) cyclisating a compound represented by Structural Formula A:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00007
  • under suitable reductive cyclisation conditions to form a compound represented by Structural Formula B:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00008
  • wherein R10 is LG1 or —X1R1, and LG1 is a suitable leaving group. If R10 is LG1 in Structural Formula (B), the method optionally further includes the step of: b) replacing -LG1 of Structural Formula (B) with —X1(R1) under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • Any suitable reductive cyclisation condition known in the art, for example, in WO 2005/121152, WO 2005/068466, and WO 2004/108138, can be employed in the invention. In one embodiment, the reductive cyclisation is performed by the use of Zn powder in acetic acid (Zn/AcOH) or by the use of Fe powder in acetic acid (Fe/AcOH).
  • Any suitable leaving group known in the art can be employed in the invention for LG1. One suitable example of LG1 is halogen, such as —Cl, —Br, or —I. Other suitable examples of LG1 include triflate (—OSO2CF3), tosylate (O-(p-toluenesulfonyl)), mesylate (—OSO2(CH3)), lower alkyl sulfones, such as methylsulfone (—SO2Me), etc. In one specific embodiment, LG1 is —Cl.
  • The —X1R1 moiety of R10 can be introduced at any suitable point during the synthesis of a compound of Structural Formula (I), for example, prior to or after the reductive cyclisation step a). In one embodiment, the —X1R1 introduction is performed after the reductive cyclisation step a). In this embodiment, R10 in Structural Formulae (A) and (B) is -LG1 (see Compounds (1a) and (1b) in Scheme 1). As shown in Scheme 1, Compound (1a) undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to form Compound (1b). The -LG1 leaving group of Compound (1b) is then replaced with —X1R1 after the cyclisation step a).
  • In another embodiment, the —X1R1 introduction is performed prior to the reductive cyclisation step a). For example, as shown in Scheme 1, the -LG1 leaving group of Compound (1a) is replaced with —X1R1 prior to the reductive cyclisation step a) to form Compound (1c). Compound (1c) then undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to produce a compound represented by Structural Formula (I).
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00009
  • In yet another embodiment, the —X1R1 group can be introduced during the synthesis of the compounds represented by Structural Formula (A).
  • The —X1R1 group can replace -LG1 in a variety of ways known to one skilled in the art depending upon the values of X1. For example, if X1 is —O—, —NR7— or —S—, then HX1R1 can displace -LG1 in the presence of suitable base or acid, solvent and conditions. Suitable displacement reactions are known to one skilled in the art and can be found in a variety of resources, including “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry.” A sulfur linker (wherein X1 is —S—) can be oxidized under suitable oxidation conditions to form compounds wherein X1 is —S(O)— or —S(O)2—. Compounds of Structural Formula (I), wherein X1 is a bond and R1 is bonded to X1 via a carbon atom, can be formed under suitable cross-coupling conditions. In these cross coupling reactions, one of the starting materials is R1 bonded to a cross-coupling group. This starting material can react with, for example, the compounds of Structural Formula (B) wherein R10-LG1 under suitable cross coupling conditions to form compounds of Structural Formula (I), wherein X1 is a bond and R1 is bonded to X1 via a carbon atom.
  • The term “cross-coupling reaction”, as used herein, refers to a reaction in which a carbon-carbon bond is formed with the aid of a metal catalyst. Usually, one of the carbon atoms is bonded to a functional group (a “cross-coupling group”) while the other carbon atom is bonded to a halogen. Examples of cross coupling reactions include, but are not limited to, Suzuki couplings, Stille couplings, and Negishi couplings.
  • The term “cross-coupling group”, as used herein, refers to a functional group capable of reacting with another functional group (e.g., halo) in a cross coupling reaction to form a carbon-carbon (“C—C”) bond. In some embodiments, the C—C bond is formed between two aromatic groups.
  • The term “cross coupling condition”, as used herein, refers to the chemical conditions (e.g., temperature, length of time of reaction, volume of solvent required) required in order to enable the cross coupling reaction to occur.
  • Examples of cross-coupling groups and their respective cross-coupling conditions include, but are not limited to, boronic acids and boronic esters with Suzuki coupling conditions, SnBu3 (Bu: butyl) with Stille coupling conditions, and ZnX (X: halogen) with Negishi coupling conditions.
  • All three of these coupling conditions typically involve the use of a catalyst, a suitable solvent, and optionally a base. Suzuki coupling conditions involve the use of a palladium catalyst and a suitable solvent. Examples of suitable palladium catalysts include, but are not limited to, PdCl2(PPh3)2, Pd(Ph3)4, and PdCl2(dppf) (wherein each Ph is phenyl, and dppf is 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene). Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, K2CO3 and Na2CO3. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, and ethanol.
  • Stille coupling conditions involve the use of a catalyst (usually palladium, but sometimes nickel), a suitable solvent, and other optional reagents. Examples of suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to, PdCl2(PPh3)2, Pd(Ph3)4, and PdCl2(dppf). Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, and dimethylformamide.
  • Negishi coupling conditions involve the use of a catalyst (palladium or nickel) and a suitable solvent. Examples of suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to Pd2(dba)3, Ni(PPh3)2Cl2, PdCl2(PPh3)2, and Pd(Ph3)4 (where “dba” is tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium). Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, and dimethylformamide
  • Suzuki, Stille, and Negishi conditions are known to one skilled in the art and are described in more detail in a variety of references, including “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry”.
  • As would be understood by one skilled in the art, cross-coupling groups are formed from coupling group precursors. A coupling group precursor is a reagent or group of reagents used to form a cross-coupling group. Examples include, but are not limited to, bis(pinacolato)diborane for the formation of boronate esters, trimethylborates for the formation of boronic acids, Bu3SnCl for the formation of stannanes, and ZnCl2 for the formation zincates in Negishi coupling reactions. Examples of suitable coupling group formation conditions include, but are not limited to, making boronic esters via palladium-mediated catalysis; making boronic acids by hydrolyzing boronic esters; making stannanes via a two step process: 1) halogen metal exchange followed by 2) transmetallation with Bu3SnCl and making zincates via a two step process: 1) halogen metal exchange followed by 2) addition of ZnCl2.
  • In some embodiments, X1 is —NR7—. As shown in Scheme 2, the replacement reaction between the -LG1 group of Compounds (1a) and (1b) with —NR1R7 can be done via, for example, reacting Compounds (1a) and (1b) with HNR1R7, respectively, to form respective Compounds (2c) and (2d). In one specific embodiment, the introduction of —NR1R7 is performed prior to the reductive cyclisation step a). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in Scheme 2, Compound (1a) reacts with HNR1R7 to form Compound (2c). Compound (2c) then further undergoes the cyclisation step a) to form compound (2d), a compound of Structural Formula (I).
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00010
  • In another specific embodiment, X1 is —NR7—; and the —NR1R7 introduction is performed after the reductive cyclisation step a). In this embodiment, for example, Compound (1a) undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to form Compound (1b). The -LG1 leaving group of Compound (1b) is then replaced with —NR1R7 via reacting Compound (1b) with HNR1R7 to form compound (2d), a compound of Structural Formula (I).
  • The compounds of Structural Formula (A) (e.g, Compound (1a)) can be prepared by any suitable method known in the art. In one embodiment, a compound of Structural Formula (A) can be prepared via reacting a compound of Structural Formula (D):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00011
  • with a compound of Structural Formula (E):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00012
  • under suitable conditions, as shown in Scheme 3. LG2 in Structural Formula (E) is a suitable leaving group.
  • Any suitable condition known in the art can be employed for the reaction of the compounds of Structural formula (D) and the compounds of Structural Formula (E). In Scheme 3, Steps C (when R6 is —H) and H (R6 is other then —H), respectively, can go through by the aid of a base, such as potassium carbonate, in a suitable organic solvent system. Suitable solvents for this reaction include DCM (dichloromethane), THF (tetrahydrofuran), petroleum ether, acetone, and mixtures thereof. In one example, a compound of Structural formula (D) is suspended in a mixture of DCM (dichloromethane) and THF (tetrahydrofuran), and into this suspension is added a base, such as potassium carbonate. A compound of Structural Formula (E) is then added into the resulting mixture. In another example, a mixture of a compound of Structural Formulae (D) and (E) is heated in the presence of a base, such as potassium carbonate, in a polar organic solvent, such as acetone.
  • Any suitable leaving group known in the art can be employed in the invention for LG2. One suitable example of LG2 is halogen, such as —Cl, —Br, or —I. Other suitable examples of LG1 include triflate (—OSO2CF3), tosylate (O-(p-toluenesulfonyl)), mesylate (—OSO2(CH3)), lower alkyl sulfones, such as methylsulfone (—SO2Me), etc. In one specific embodiment, LG2 is —Cl.
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00013
  • The compounds of Structural Formula (D) can be prepared by any suitable method known in the art, for example, Barrett, et al., Bioorganic & Medical Chemistry Letters, 2004, 14(10), 2543-2546. In one embodiment, the compounds of Structural Formula (D) are prepared by reacting Compound (4a) with a hydrazide (e.g., formohydrazide, acetohydrazide, isobutyrohydrazide, etc.: Step A) followed by de-protection of the amine protecting group “Proc” of Compound (4b) (Step B), as shown in Scheme 4. The “Proc” group in each of Compounds (4a) and (4b) is a suitable amine protecting group. Any suitable amine protecting group known in the art can be employed in the invention. Suitable examples include Carbobenzyloxy (Cbz), p-Methoxybenzyl carbonyl (Moz or MeOZ), tert-Butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), 9-Fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (FMOC), Benzyl (Bn), p-Methoxybenzyl (PMB), 3,4-Dimethoxybenzyl (DMPM), p-methoxyphenyl (PMP), Tosyl (Ts), etc. Any suitable condition known in the art, for example, those of Barrett, et al., can be employed for the hydrazide reaction and the deprotection steps. Exemplary conditions for these steps are depicted in Scheme 4, where CDI is N,N1-carbonyldiimidazole, DCM is dichloromethane, and TFA is teterafluoroacetic acid.
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00014
  • The compounds of Structural Formula (D), wherein R6 is other than —H, can be prepared by reacting Compound (4c) with a suitable reagent known in the art as a source for the non-hydrogen R6 group (e.g., R6Br, R6Cl, NaBH(OC(O)CH3)3 (for R6=cyclopentyl), etc.) to form Compound (4d) having non-hydrogen R6 (Step G in Scheme 5).
  • The non-hydrogen R6 group can generally be introduced during the preparation of the compounds of Structural Formula (D) as discussed above. Alternatively, as shown in Scheme 5, the non-hydrogen R6 group can be introduced after the cyclisation step a) as desired by reacting Compound (5a) with a suitable reagent known in the art as a source for the non-hydrogen R6 group (e.g., R6Br, R6Cl, etc.) to form Compound (5b):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00015
  • In one embodiment, the compounds represented by Structural Formula (I), wherein X1 is —NR7—, and R6 is other than —H, are prepared by the methods of the invention. In one specific embodiment, the methods comprise Steps A-F of Scheme 6. In yet another specific embodiment, the methods comprise Steps A, B, G, H, I and F of Scheme 7. In yet another specific embodiment, the methods comprise Steps A, B, G, H, J and K of Scheme 8. In Schemes 6, 7 and 8 below, each R6 is other than —H.
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00016
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00017
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00018
  • In each of Schemes 6, 7 and 8: Steps A and B are independently as those described above in Scheme 4 for the synthesis of the compounds of Structural Formula (D); Steps C and H are independently as those described above in Scheme 3; Steps D, I and K are independently as described above for the reductive cyclisation step a); Steps G and E are independently as described above for those in Schemes 4 and 5, respectively; and Steps F and J are independently as described above for the amination reaction of Compound (1b) with HNR1R7 to form Compound (2d) in Scheme 2. In yet another specific embodiment, LG1 and LG2 are independently halogen, such as —Cl, —Br, or —I, in each of Schemes 6, 7 and 8. In yet another specific embodiment, LG1 and LG2 are both —Cl in each of Schemes 6, 7 and 8.
  • In one embodiment, the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by Structural Formula (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described below.
  • The first set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, —S—, —S(O)—, or —S(O)2—. Specifically, X1 is —O—, —NR7—, or —S—. More specifically, X1 is —NR7—.
  • R1 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R1 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J1. Specifically, R1 is optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl. Specifically, R1 is optionally substituted C6-10 aryl or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl. More specifically, R1 is optionally substituted C6-10 aryl or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl. More specifically, R1 is optionally substituted phenyl or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl. More specifically, R1 is optionally substituted phenyl.
  • Each R2, R3, R4, and R5 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-10 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloaliphatic groups represented by R2, R3, R4, and R5, respectively, is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J2, J3, J4, and J5, respectively. Optionally, R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB. Optionally, R3 and R4, together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB. Optionally, R4 and R5, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB.
  • Specifically, each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, R3 and R4, and R4 and R5, respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring. Specifically, each of R2, R3, R4, and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl ring. Specifically, each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl ring. Specifically, each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl ring. More specifically, R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; R3 is C1-3 alkyl; R4 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; and R5 is —H or C1-3 alkyl. More specifically, R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R4 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; and R5 is —H or C1-3 alkyl. More specifically, R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; R3 is C1-3 alkyl; R4 is —H; and R5 is —H. More specifically, R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R4 is —H; and R5 is —H.
  • R6 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R6 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J6. Specifically, R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl. Specifically, R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic. Specifically, R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl. Specifically, R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl. More specifically, R6 is optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl. Even more specifically, R6 is cyclopentyl.
  • R7 is —H, or a C1-6 aliphatic or C3-8 cycloaliphatic group optionally substituted with one or more instanced of JA, or, optionally R7, together with R1 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring that is optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB. Specifically, the heterocyclic ring formed with R1 and R7 is 5-6 membered. Specifically, R7 is —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic. More specifically, R7 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl. Even more specifically, R7 is —H.
  • R8 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-8 cycloaliphatic, wherein said aliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA, and wherein said cycloaliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB. Specifically, R8 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, or C3-7cyclo(haloalkyl). Specifically, R8 is —H or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic. Specifically, R8 is —H or optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl. Specifically, R8 is —H, C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 haloalkyl. Specifically, R8 is —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Each J1 is independently T or C1-6aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T.
  • Each of J2, J3, J4, J5, and J6 is independently M, or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M.
  • Each T is independently halogen, oxo, —NO2, —CN, Q1, —Z1—H, or —Z2-Q2. Specifically, each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2.
  • More specifically, each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • Each M is independently halogen, oxo, —NO2, —CN, —OR′, —SR′, —N(R′)2, —COR′, —CO2R′, —CONR′2, —OCOR″, —OCON(R′)2, —NRCOR′, —NRCO2R′, —NRCON(R′)2, —S(O)R″, —SO2R″, —SO2N(R′)2, —NRSO2R″, —NRSO2N(R′)2, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each of said cycloaliphatic, heterocyclyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups represented by M is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of JB.
  • Each Z1 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups (e.g., up to four groups) independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(═NR)—, —C(═NOR)—, and —SO2N(R)—. Specifically, each Z1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —CO2—, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —SO2N(R)—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Each Z2 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(═NR)—, —C(═NOR)—, —S(O)—, and —S(O)2—. Specifically, each Z2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —CO2—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —S(O)2—, —SO2N(R)—, —N(R)SO2—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Each Q1 is independently C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each Q1 is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JQ. Specifically, each Q1 is independently optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl. More specifically, each Q1 is independently optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl.
  • Each Q2 is independently C1-6aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, or Q1-Q1, each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of JQ; or each Q2, together with R and the nitrogen atom to which is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB. Specifically, each Q2 is independently optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, or each Q2, together with R and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring.
  • Each JQ is independently M or C1-6aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M. Specifically, values of JQ for each of the C3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, and 4-7 membered heterocyclyl groups represented by Q1 independently include halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl. Specifically, values of JQ for the C1-6 aliphatic (e.g., C1-6 alkyl) represented by Q2 include halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Values of JQ for each of the cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by Q2 independently include halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each R is independently —H or C1-6 aliphatic, or each R, together with Q2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB. Specifically, the C1-4 aliphatic group is C1-4 alkyl. Specifically, each R is independently —H, —CH3 or —CH2CH3, or each R, together with Q2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB.
  • Each R′ is independently —H or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA; or two R′ groups, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB. Specifically, the C1-4 aliphatic group is C1-4 alkyl.
  • Each R″ is independently C1-4 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA. Specifically, the C1-4 aliphatic group is C1-4 alkyl.
  • Each JA is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C3-7 cycloalkyl, and C3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl).
  • Each JB is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), and C1-C4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA.
  • In a second set of variables of Structural Formula (I), X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7, or —S—; and values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A third set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R1 is optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R7 is —H or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A fifth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R7 is —H or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R1 is optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • R7 is —H or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A seventh set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • An eighth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values of X1, R1 and R7, wherever applicable, are independently as described above in the second, third, fourth, fifth or sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A ninth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, R3 and R4, and R4 and R5, respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A tenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values of X1, R1, R6 and R7, wherever applicable, are independently as described above in the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh or eighth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • Each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, R3 and R4, and R4 and R5, respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • An eleventh set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7, wherever applicable, are independently as described above in the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, or ninth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R8 is —H or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • An twelfth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Each Z1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO2—, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —SO2N(R)—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Each Z2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO2—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —S(O)2—, —SO2N(R)—, —N(R)SO2—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A thirteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values of X1, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 and R7, wherever applicable, are independently as described above in the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, or tenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • Each Z1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO2—, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —SO2N(R)—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Each Z2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO2—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —S(O)2—, —SO2N(R)—, —N(R)SO2—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A fourteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A fifteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A sixteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • R7 is —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A seventeenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR—, or —S—.
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R7 is —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A eighteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • Each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, R3 and R4, and R4 and R5, respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R7 is —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • R8 is —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • An nineteenth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is a bond, —O—, —NR7—, or —S—.
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • Each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, R3 and R4, and R4 and R5, respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 3-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
  • R7 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twentieth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values, including specific values, of X1, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are independently as described above in any set of fourteenth through nineteenth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R7 is —H.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty first set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values, including specific values, of X1, R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are independently as described above in any set of fourteenth through nineteenth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R7 is —H or C1-6 alkyl. Specifically, R7 is —H.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty second set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values, including specific values, of X1, R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are independently as described above in any set of fourteenth through nineteenth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R2 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl. Specifically, R2 is —H.
  • R8 is —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty third set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • Each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R7 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl.
  • R8 is —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • i) R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; R3 is C1-3 alkyl; R4 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; and R5 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; or ii) R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R4 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; and R5 is —H or C1-3 alkyl.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R7 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl.
  • R8 is —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty fifth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl). Alternatively, R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —SH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2. Specifically, R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • i) R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; R3 is C1-3 alkyl; R4 is —H; and R5 is —H; or ii) R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R4 is —H; and R5 is —H.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R2 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl.
  • R8 is —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
  • i) R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; R3 is C1-3 alkyl; R4 is —H; and R5 is —H; or ii) R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R4 is —H; and R5 is —H.
  • R6 is —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl.
  • R7 is —H, or C1-6 alkyl.
  • R8 is —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty seventh set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values, including specific values, of R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are independently as described above in the twenty sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R7 is —H.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty eighth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • Values, including specific values, of R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are independently as described above in the twenty sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • R6 is optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl
  • R7 is —H.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A twenty ninth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is —O—, or —S—.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in any set of the first through twenty eighth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A thirtieth set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • X1 is —NR7—.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in any set of the first through twenty eighth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A thirty first set of variables of Structural Formula (I) is as follows:
  • q is 0
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in any set of the first through thirtieth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • In another embodiment, the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by Structural Formula (II) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (II) are as described below:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00019
  • In a first set of variables of Structural Formula (II), values, including specific values, of variables of Structural Formula (II) are independently as described above in any set of the first through twenty sixth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A second set of variables of Structural Formula (II) is as follows:
  • R6 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-7 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of the C1-6 aliphatic and C3-7 cycloaliphatic groups is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J6.
  • Values, including specific values, of variables of Structural Formula (II) are independently as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A third set of variables of Structural Formula (II) is as follows:
  • R1 is optionally substituted C6-10 aryl or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Each Z1 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO2—, —C(O)N(R)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —SO2N(R)—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Each Z2 is independently —N(R)—, —O—, —S—, —CO2—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)N(R)—, —N(R)C(O)—, —OC(O)N(R)—, —N(R)CO2—, —N(R)C(O)N(R)—, —C(O)N(R)CO2—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —SO2N(R)—, —N(R)SO2—, or —N(R)SO2N(R)—.
  • Each Q1 is independently optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl.
  • Each of R2 and R3 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, or C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom(s) to which they are bound, independently form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloalkyl ring is independently and optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • R6 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic or C3-7 cycloaliphatic, each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl).
  • Each of R7 and R8 is independently —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • In another embodiment, the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by Structural Formula (III) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (III) are as described below:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00020
  • In a first set of variables of Structural Formula (III), values, including specific values, of variables of Structural Formula (III) are independently as described above in any set of the first through twenty sixth sets of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • In a second set of variables of Structural Formula (III), values, including specific values, of variables of Structural Formula (III) are independently as described above in the second or third set of variables of Structural Formula (II).
  • A third set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • Phenyl ring A is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T.
  • Each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2.
  • Q1 is C3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each Q2 is independently C1-6 alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7membered heterocyclyl, or each Q2, together with R, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted, 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; wherein said C1-6 alkyl represented by Q2 is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl); and wherein each of said cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by Q2 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each of R2 and R3 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R6 is optionally substituted —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl.
  • Each of R7 and R8 is independently —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • Phenyl ring A is substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of —C(O)N(R)H, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —CO2H, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, and —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2; and optionally further substituted with one or one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each Q2 is independently C1-6alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7membered heterocyclyl, or each Q2, together with R, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted, 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; wherein said C1-6 alkyl represented by Q2 is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl); and wherein each of said cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by Q2 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each of R2 and R3 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R6 is optionally substituted —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl.
  • Each of R7 and R8 is independently —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A fifth set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • Phenyl ring A is substituted with —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, or —N(R)C(O)Q2, and optionally further substituted with one or one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each Q2 is independently C1-6alkyl, C3-7 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, or 4-7membered heterocyclyl, or each Q2, together with R, optionally and independently forms an optionally substituted, 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring; wherein said C1-6 alkyl represented by Q2 is optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl); and wherein each of said cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by Q2 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl; C1-C4 cyanoalkyl, C1-C4 aminoalkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, and C2-C4 alkoxyalkyl.
  • Each of R2 and R3 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form an optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R6 is optionally substituted —H, optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl, or optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl.
  • Each of R7 and R8 is independently —H or C1-6 alkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (I) are as described above in the first set of variables of Structural Formula (I).
  • A sixth set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • R6 is C5-6 cycloalkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (III) are independently as described in the second, third or fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (III).
  • A seventh set of variables of Structural Formula (III) is as follows:
  • R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl, and R3 is C1-3 alkyl; or R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-6 cycloalkyl ring.
  • R6 is C5-6 cycloalkyl.
  • Values, including specific values, of the remaining variables of Structural Formula (III) are independently as described in the second, third or fourth set of variables of Structural Formula (III).
  • In yet another embodiment, the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by any one of the following structural formulae, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00021
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00022
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00023
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00024
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00025
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00026
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00027
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00028
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00029
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00030
  • In yet another embodiment, the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compounds represented by any one of the following structural formulae, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00031
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00032
    Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00033
  • In yet another embodiment, the methods of the invention can be employed in preparing the compound represented by the following structural formula:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00034
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
  • Additional examples of compounds that can be prepared by the methods of the invention can be found in, for example, US 2009/0062292.
  • In some embodiments, the methods of the invention further comprise the step of reacting a compound of Structural Formula (D):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00035
  • with a compound of Structural Formula (E):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00036
  • under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (A). Details of this formation of a compound of Structural Formula (A) are as described above.
  • In some embodiments, the compounds prepared by a method of the invention are represented by Structural Formula (II), or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein values of the variables of Structural Formula (II) are independently as described above in the first, second, or third set of varaibles of Structural Formula (II). In these embodiments, the method comprises: a) cyclizing a compound represented by StructuralFormula (A1):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00037
  • under suitable reductive cyclisation conditions to form a compound represented by Structural Formula (B1):
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00038
  • wherein: R10 is LG1 or —NR1R7; and LG1 is a suitable leaving group; and b) optionally, when R10 of Structural Formula (B1) is LG1, further comprising the step of replacing -LG1 of Structural Formula (B1) with —NR1R7 under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (I). In one specific aspect of these embodiments, R10 of Structural Formula (A1) is -LG1, and the method comprises the step of replacing -LG1 of Structural Formula (A1) with —NR1R7 prior to the cyclisation step a) by reacting the compound represented by Structural Formula (A1) with HNR1R7 under suitable conditions to form the compound represented by Structural Formula (A1) having —NR1R7 for R10. The compound represented by Structural Formula (A1) having —NR1R7 for R10 then undergoes the reductive cyclisation step a) to form a compound represented by Structural Formula (B) wherein R10 is —NR1R7, i.e., a compound represented by Structural Formula (II).
  • It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that in the processes of the present invention certain functional groups such as hydroxyl or amino groups in the starting reagents or intermediate compounds may need to be protected by protecting groups. Thus, the preparation of the compounds described above may involve, at various stages, the addition and removal of one or more protecting groups. The protection and deprotection of functional groups is described in “Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry.” edited by J. W. F. McOmie, Plenum Press (1973) and “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis,” 3rd edition, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Wiley Interscience, and “Protecting Groups,” 3rd edition, P. J. Kocienski, Thieme (2005)
  • For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry are described in “Organic Chemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausolito: 1999, and “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 5th Ed., Ed.: Smith, M. B. and March, J., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 2001, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • As described herein, compounds of the invention may optionally be substituted with one or more substituents, such as illustrated generally below, or as exemplified by particular classes, subclasses, and species of the compounds described above. It will be appreciated that the phrase “optionally substituted” is used interchangeably with the phrase “substituted or unsubstituted.” In general, the term “substituted”, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an optionally substituted group may have a substituent at each substitutable position of the group. When more than one position in a given structure can be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at each position. When the term “optionally substituted” precedes a list, said term refers to all of the subsequent substitutable groups in that list. If a substituent radical or structure is not identified or defined as “optionally substituted”, the substituent radical or structure is unsubstituted. For example, if X is optionally substituted C1-C3alkyl or phenyl; X may be either optionally substituted C1-C3 alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl. Likewise, if the term “optionally substituted” follows a list, said term also refers to all of the substitutable groups in the prior list unless otherwise indicated. For example: if X is C1-C3alkyl or phenyl wherein X is optionally and independently substituted by JX, then both C1-C3alkyl and phenyl may be optionally substituted by JX. As is apparent to one having ordinary skill in the art, groups such as H, halogen, NO2, CN, NH2, OH, or OCF3 would not be substitutable groups.
  • The phrase “up to”, as used herein, refers to zero or any integer number that is equal or less than the number following the phrase. For example, “up to 3” means any one of 0, 1, 2, and 3. As described herein, a specified number range of atoms includes any integer therein. For example, a group having from 1-4 atoms could have 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms.
  • Selection of substituents and combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. The term “stable”, as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, specifically, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein. In some embodiments, a stable compound or chemically feasible compound is one that is not substantially altered when kept at a temperature of 40° C. or less, in the absence of moisture or other chemically reactive conditions, for at least a week. Only those choices and combinations of substituents that result in a stable structure are contemplated. Such choices and combinations will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art and may be determined without undue experimentation.
  • The term “aliphatic” or “aliphatic group”, as used herein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), or branched, hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation but is non-aromatic. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-10 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-6 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. Aliphatic groups may be linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl groups. Specific examples include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, n-propyl, sec-butyl, vinyl, n-butenyl, ethynyl, and tert-butyl and acetylene.
  • The term “alkyl” as used herein means a saturated straight or branched chain hydrocarbon. The term “alkenyl” as used herein means a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon comprising one or more double bonds. The term “alkynyl” as used herein means a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon comprising one or more triple bonds. Each of the “alkyl”, “alkenyl” or “alkynyl” as used herein can be optionally substituted as set forth below. In some embodiments, the “alkyl” is C1-C6 alkyl or C1-C4 alkyl. In some embodiments, the “alkenyl” is C2-C6 alkenyl or C2-C4 alkenyl. In some embodiments, the “alkynyl” is C2-C6 alkynyl or C2-C4 alkynyl.
  • The term “cycloaliphatic” (or “carbocycle” or “carbocyclyl” or “carbocyclic”) refers to a non-aromatic carbon only containing ring system which can be saturated or contains one or more units of unsaturation, having three to fourteen ring carbon atoms. In some embodiments, the number of carbon atoms is 3 to 10. In other embodiments, the number of carbon atoms is 4 to 7. In yet other embodiments, the number of carbon atoms is 5 or 6. The term includes monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic, fused, spiro or bridged carbocyclic ring systems. The term also includes polycyclic ring systems in which the carbocyclic ring can be “fused” to one or more non-aromatic carbocyclic or heterocyclic rings or one or more aromatic rings or combination thereof, wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the carbocyclic ring. “Fused” bicyclic ring systems comprise two rings which share two adjoining ring atoms. Bridged bicyclic group comprise two rings which share three or four adjacent ring atoms. Spiro bicyclic ring systems share one ring atom. Examples of cycloaliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl groups. Specific examples include, but are not limited to, cyclohexyl, cyclopropenyl, and cyclobutyl.
  • The term “heterocycle” (or “heterocyclyl,” or “heterocyclic” or “non-aromatic heterocycle”) as used herein refers to a non-aromatic ring system which can be saturated or contain one or more units of unsaturation, having three to fourteen ring atoms in which one or more ring carbons is replaced by a heteroatom such as, N, S, or O and each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 members. In some embodiments, non-aromatic heterocyclic rings comprise up to three heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring. In other embodiments, non-aromatic heterocyclic rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring system. In yet other embodiments, non-aromatic heterocyclic rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N and O within the ring system. The term includes monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic fused, spiro or bridged heterocyclic ring systems. The term also includes polycyclic ring systems in which the heterocyclic ring can be fused to one or more non-aromatic carbocyclic or heterocyclic rings or one or more aromatic rings or combination thereof, wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the heterocyclic ring. Examples of heterocycles include, but are not limited to, piperidinyl, piperizinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, azepanyl, diazepanyl, triazepanyl, azocanyl, diazocanyl, triazocanyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, oxazocanyl, oxazepanyl, thiazepanyl, thiazocanyl, benzimidazolonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, morpholino, including, for example, 3-morpholino, 4-morpholino, 2-thiomorpholino, 3-thiomorpholino, 4-thiomorpholino, 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl, 3-pyrrolidinyl, 1-tetrahydropiperazinyl, 2-tetrahydropiperazinyl, 3-tetrahydropiperazinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 1-pyrazolinyl, 3-pyrazolinyl, 4-pyrazolinyl, 5-pyrazolinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-piperidinyl, 2-thiazolidinyl, 3-thiazolidinyl, 4-thiazolidinyl, 1-imidazolidinyl, 2-imidazolidinyl, 4-imidazolidinyl, 5-imidazolidinyl, indolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, benzothiolanyl, benzodithianyl, 3-(1-alkyl)-benzimidazol-2-onyl, and 1,3-dihydro-imidazol-2-onyl.
  • The term “aryl” (or “aryl ring” or “aryl group”) used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl”, “aralkoxy”, “aryloxyalkyl”, or “heteroaryl” refers to carbocyclic aromatic ring systems. The term “aryl” may be used interchangeably with the terms “aryl ring” or “aryl group”. “Carbocyclic aromatic ring” groups have only carbon ring atoms (typically six to fourteen) and include monocyclic aromatic rings such as phenyl and fused polycyclic aromatic ring systems in which two or more carbocyclic aromatic rings are fused to one another. Examples include 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 1-anthracyl and 2-anthracyl. Also included within the scope of the term “carbocyclic aromatic ring” or “carbocyclic aromatic”, as it is used herein, is a group in which an aromatic ring is “fused” to one or more non-aromatic rings (carbocyclic or heterocyclic), such as in an indanyl, phthalimidyl, naphthimidyl, phenanthridinyl, or tetrahydronaphthyl, where the radical or point of attachment is on the aromatic ring.
  • The terms “heteroaryl”, “heteroaromatic”, “heteroaryl ring”, “heteroaryl group”, “aromatic heterocycle” or “heteroaromatic group”, used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “heteroaralkyl” or “heteroarylalkoxy”, refer to heteroaromatic ring groups having five to fourteen members, in which one or more ring carbons is replaced by a heteroatom such as, N, S, or O. In some embodiments, heteroaryl rings comprise up to three heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring. In other embodiments, heteroaryl rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N, S and O within the ring system. In yet other embodiments, heteroaryl rings comprise up to two heteroatoms selected from N and O within the ring system. Heteroaryl rings include monocyclic heteroaromatic rings and polycyclic aromatic rings in which a monocyclic aromatic ring is fused to one or more other aromatic rings. Also included within the scope of the term “heteroaryl”, as it is used herein, is a group in which an aromatic ring is “fused” to one or more non-aromatic rings (carbocyclic or heterocyclic), where the radical or point of attachment is on the aromatic ring. Bicyclic 6,5 heteroaromatic ring, as used herein, for example, is a six membered heteroaromatic ring fused to a second five membered ring, wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the six membered ring. Examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, imidazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl or thiadiazolyl including, for example, 2-furanyl, 3-furanyl, N-imidazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, 5-imidazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-oxadiazolyl, 5-oxadiazolyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 4-pyrazolyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-triazolyl, 5-triazolyl, tetrazolyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, carbazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothienyl, benzofuranyl, indolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, isoquinolinyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, acridinyl, benzisoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, 1,2,3-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,5-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,2,3-thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, purinyl, pyrazinyl, 1,3,5-triazinyl, quinolinyl (e.g., 2-quinolinyl, 3-quinolinyl, 4-quinolinyl), and isoquinolinyl (e.g., 1-isoquinolinyl, 3-isoquinolinyl, or 4-isoquinolinyl).
  • As used herein, “cyclo”, “cyclic”, “cyclic group” or “cyclic moiety”, include mono-, bi-, and tri-cyclic ring systems including cycloaliphatic, heterocycloaliphatic, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which has been previously defined.
  • As used herein, a “bicyclic ring system” includes 8-12 (e.g., 9, 10, or 11) membered structures that form two rings, wherein the two rings have at least one atom in common (e.g., 2 atoms in common). Bicyclic ring systems include bicycloaliphatics (e.g., bicycloalkyl or bicycloalkenyl), bicycloheteroaliphatics, bicyclic aryls, and bicyclic heteroaryls.
  • As used herein, a “bridged bicyclic ring system” refers to a bicyclic heterocycloalipahtic ring system or bicyclic cycloaliphatic ring system in which the rings are bridged. Examples of bridged bicyclic ring systems include, but are not limited to, adamantanyl, norbornanyl, bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, bicyclo[3.3.1]nonyl, bicyclo[3.2.3]nonyl, 2-oxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 1-aza-bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, 3-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octyl, and 2,6-dioxa-tricyclo[3.3.1.03,7]nonyl. A bridged bicyclic ring system can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents such as alkyl (including carboxyalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, and haloalkyl such as trifluoromethyl), alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, (cycloalkyl)alkyl, heterocycloalkyl, (heterocycloalkyl)alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, cycloalkyloxy, heterocycloalkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aralkyloxy, heteroaralkyloxy, aroyl, heteroaroyl, nitro, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, aminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonylamino, cycloalkylcarbonylamino, (cycloalkylalkyl)carbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, aralkylcarbonylamino, (heterocycloalkyl)carbonylamino, (heterocycloalkylalkyl)carbonylamino, heteroarylcarbonylamino, heteroaralkylcarbonylamino, cyano, halo, hydroxy, acyl, mercapto, alkylsulfanyl, sulfoxy, urea, thiourea, sulfamoyl, sulfamide, oxo, or carbamoyl.
  • As used herein, “bridge” refers to a bond or an atom or an unbranched chain of atoms connecting two different parts of a molecule. The two atoms that are connected through the bridge (usually but not always, two tertiary carbon atoms) are denotated as “bridgeheads”.
  • As used herein, the term “spiro” refers to ring systems having one atom (usually a quaternary carbon) as the only common atom between two rings.
  • The term “ring atom” is an atom such as C, N, O or S that is in the ring of an aromatic group, cycloalkyl group or non-aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • A “substitutable ring atom” in an aromatic group is a ring carbon or nitrogen atom bonded to a hydrogen atom. The hydrogen can be optionally replaced with a suitable substituent group. Thus, the term “substitutable ring atom” does not include ring nitrogen or carbon atoms which are shared when two rings are fused. In addition, “substitutable ring atom” does not include ring carbon or nitrogen atoms when the structure depicts that they are already attached to a moiety other than hydrogen.
  • The term “heteroatom” means one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon (including, any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or silicon; the quaternized form of any basic nitrogen or; a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR+ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl)).
  • As used herein an optionally substituted aralkyl can be substituted on both the alkyl and the aryl portion. Unless otherwise indicated as used herein optionally substituted aralkyl is optionally substituted on the aryl portion.
  • In some embodiments, an aliphatic group and a heterocyclic ring may independently contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the saturated carbon of an aliphatic group or of a non-aromatic heterocyclic ring are selected from those described above, for example, in the definition of JA and JB. Other suitable substitutents include those listed as suitable for the unsaturated carbon of an aryl or heteroaryl group and additionally include the following: ═O, ═S, ═NNHR*, ═NN(R*)2, ═NNHC(O)R*, ═NNHCO2(alkyl), ═NNHSO2(alkyl), or ═NR*, wherein each R* is independently selected from hydrogen or an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic. Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of R* are selected from NH2, NH(C1-4 aliphatic), N(C1-4 aliphatic)2, halogen, C1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C1-4 aliphatic), NO2, CN, CO2H, CO2(C1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C1-4aliphatic groups of R* is unsubstituted.
  • In some embodiments, optional substituents on the nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring include those described above. Examples of such suitable substituents include —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), and C1-C4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C3-7 cycloalkyl, and C3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl). Other suitable substituents include —R+, —N(R+)2, —C(O)R+, —CO2R+, —C(O)C(O)R+, —C(O)CH2C(O)R+, —SO2R+, —SO2N(R+)2, —C(═S)N(R+)2, —C(═NH)—N(R+)2, or —NR+SO2R+; wherein R+ is hydrogen, an optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted —O(Ph), optionally substituted —CH2(Ph), optionally substituted —(CH2)2(Ph); optionally substituted —CH═CH(Ph); or an unsubstituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring having one to four heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, or, two independent occurrences of R+, on the same substituent or different substituents, taken together with the atom(s) to which each R+ group is bound, form a 5-8-membered heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring or a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl ring, wherein said heteroaryl or heterocyclyl ring has 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Optional substituents on the aliphatic group or the phenyl ring of R+ are selected from NH2, NH(C1-4 aliphatic), N(C1-4 aliphatic)2, halogen, C1-4 aliphatic, OH, O(C1-4 aliphatic), NO2, CN, CO2H, CO2(C1-4 aliphatic), O(halo C1-4 aliphatic), or halo(C1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C1-4aliphatic groups of R+ is unsubstituted.
  • In some embodiments, an aryl (including aralkyl, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl and the like) or heteroaryl (including heteroaralkyl and heteroarylalkoxy and the like) group may contain one or more substituents. Suitable substituents on the unsaturated carbon atom of an aryl or heteroaryl group are selected from those described above. Specific examples include halogen, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), and C1-C4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C3-7 cycloalkyl, and C3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl). Other suitable substituents include: halogen; —Ro; —ORo; —SRo; 1,2-methylenedioxy; 1,2-ethylenedioxy; phenyl (Ph) optionally substituted with Ro; —O(Ph) optionally substituted with Ro; —(CH2)1-2(Ph), optionally substituted with Ro; —CH═CH(Ph), optionally substituted with Ro; —NO2; —CN; —N(Ro)2; —NRoC(O)Ro; —NRoC(S)Ro; —NRoC(O)N(Ro)2; —NRoC(S)N(Ro)2; —NRoCO2Ro; —NRoNRoC(O)Ro; —NRoNRoC(O)N(Ro)2; —NRoNRoCO2Ro; —C(O)C(O)Ro; —C(O)CH2C(O)Ro; —CO2Ro; —C(O)Ro; —C(S)Ro; —C(O)N(Ro)2; —C(S)N(Ro)2; —OC(O)N(Ro)2; —OC(O)Ro; —C(O)N(ORo)Ro; —C(NORoRo; —S(O)2Ro; —S(O)3Ro; —SO2N(Ro)2; —S(O)Ro; —NRoSO2N(Ro)2; —NRoSO2Ro; —N(ORoRo; —C(═NH)—N(Ro)2; or —(CH2)0-2NHC(O)Ro; wherein each independent occurrence of Ro is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, an unsubstituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring, phenyl, —O(Ph), or —CH2(Ph), or, two independent occurrences of Ro, on the same substituent or different substituents, taken together with the atom(s) to which each Ro group is bound, form a 5-8-membered heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring or a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl ring, wherein said heteroaryl or heterocyclyl ring has 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Optional substituents on the aliphatic group of Ro are selected from NH2, NH(C1-4aliphatic), N(C1-4aliphatic)2, halogen, C1-4aliphatic, OH, O(C1-4aliphatic), NO2, CN, CO2H, CO2(C1-4aliphatic), O(haloC1-4 aliphatic), or haloC1-4aliphatic, CHO, N(CO)(C1-4 aliphatic), C(O)N(C1-4 aliphatic), wherein each of the foregoing C1-4aliphatic groups of Ro is unsubstituted.
  • Non-aromatic nitrogen containing heterocyclic rings that are substituted on a ring nitrogen and attached to the remainder of the molecule at a ring carbon atom are said to be N substituted. For example, an N alkyl piperidinyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule at the two, three or four position of the piperidinyl ring and substituted at the ring nitrogen with an alkyl group. Non-aromatic nitrogen containing heterocyclic rings such as pyrazinyl that are substituted on a ring nitrogen and attached to the remainder of the molecule at a second ring nitrogen atom are said to be N′ substituted-N-heterocycles. For example, an N′ acyl N-pyrazinyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule at one ring nitrogen atom and substituted at the second ring nitrogen atom with an acyl group.
  • The term “unsaturated”, as used herein, means that a moiety has one or more units of unsaturation.
  • As detailed above, in some embodiments, two independent occurrences of Ro (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein), may be taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound to form a 5-8-membered heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl ring or a 3-8-membered cycloalkyl ring. Exemplary rings that are formed when two independent occurrences of Ro (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) are taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound include, but are not limited to the following: a) two independent occurrences of Ro (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to the same atom and are taken together with that atom to form a ring, for example N(Ro)2, where both occurrences of Ro are taken together with the nitrogen atom to form a piperidin-1-yl, piperazin-1-yl, or morpholin-4-yl group; and b) two independent occurrences of Ro (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) that are bound to different atoms and are taken together with both of those atoms to form a ring, for example where a phenyl group is substituted with two occurrences of
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00039
  • these two occurrences of Ro are taken together with the oxygen atoms to which they are bound to form a fused 6-membered oxygen containing ring:
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00040
  • It will be appreciated that a variety of other rings can be formed when two independent occurrences of Ro (or R+, or any other variable similarly defined herein) are taken together with the atom(s) to which each variable is bound and that the examples detailed above are not intended to be limiting.
  • As used herein, an “amino” group refers to —NH2.
  • The term “hydroxyl” or “hydroxy” or “alcohol moiety” refers to —OH.
  • As used herein, an “oxo” refers to ═O.
  • As used herein, the term “alkoxy”, or “alkylthio”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group, as previously defined, attached to the molecule through an oxygen (“alkoxy” e.g., —O-alkyl) or sulfur (“alkylthio” e.g., —S-alkyl) atom.
  • As used herein, the terms “halogen”, “halo”, and “hal” mean F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • As used herein, the term “cyano” or “nitrile” refer to —CN or —C≡N.
  • The terms “alkoxyalkyl”, “alkoxyalkenyl”, “alkoxyaliphatic”, and “alkoxyalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more alkoxy groups.
  • The terms “haloalkyl”, “haloalkenyl”, “haloaliphatic”, and “haloalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more halogen atoms. This term includes perfluorinated alkyl groups, such as —CF3 and —CF2CF3.
  • The terms “cyanoalkyl”, “cyanoalkenyl”, “cyanoaliphatic”, and “cyanoalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more cyano groups. In some embodiments, the cyanoalkyl is (NC)-alkyl-.
  • The terms “aminoalkyl”, “aminoalkenyl”, “aminoaliphatic”, and “aminoalkoxy” mean alkyl, alkenyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more amino groups, wherein the amino group is as defined above.
  • The terms “hydroxyalkyl”, “hydroxyaliphatic”, and “hydroxyalkoxy” mean alkyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more —OH groups.
  • The terms “alkoxyalkyl”, “alkoxyaliphatic”, and “alkoxyalkoxy” mean alkyl, aliphatic or alkoxy, as the case may be, substituted with one or more alkoxy groups. For example, an “alkoxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group such as (alkyl-O)-alkyl-, wherein alkyl has been defined above.
  • The term “protecting group” and “protective group” as used herein, are interchangeable and refer to an agent used to temporarily block one or more desired functional groups in a compound with multiple reactive sites. In certain embodiments, a protecting group has one or more, or specifically all, of the following characteristics: a) is added selectively to a functional group in good yield to give a protected substrate that is b) stable to reactions occurring at one or more of the other reactive sites; and c) is selectively removable in good yield by reagents that do not attack the regenerated, deprotected functional group. As would be understood by one skilled in the art, in some cases, the reagents do not attack other reactive groups in the compound. In other cases, the reagents may also react with other reactive groups in the compound. Examples of protecting groups are detailed in Greene, T. W., Wuts, P. G in “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York: 1999 (and other editions of the book), the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. The term “nitrogen protecting group”, as used herein, refers to an agent used to temporarily block one or more desired nitrogen reactive sites in a multifunctional compound. Preferred nitrogen protecting groups also possess the characteristics exemplified for a protecting group above, and certain exemplary nitrogen protecting groups are also detailed in Chapter 7 in Greene, T. W., Wuts, P. G in “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York: 1999, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • As used herein, the term “displaceable moiety” or “leaving group” refers to a group that is associated with an aliphatic or aromatic group as defined herein and is subject to being displaced by nucleophilic attack by a nucleophile.
  • Unless otherwise indicated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, cis-trans, conformational, and rotational) forms of the structure. For example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, (Z) and (E) double bond isomers, and (Z) and (E) conformational isomers are included in this invention, unless only one of the isomers is drawn specifically. As would be understood to one skilled in the art, a substituent can freely rotate around any rotatable bonds. For example, a substituent drawn as
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00041
  • also represents
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00042
  • Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, cis/trans, conformational, and rotational mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention.
  • Unless otherwise indicated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention.
  • Additionally, unless otherwise indicated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures except for the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13C- or 14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention. Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools or probes in biological assays. Such compounds, especially deuterium analogs, can also be therapeutically useful.
  • The terms “a bond” and “absent” are used interchangeably to indicate that a group is absent.
  • The compounds of the invention are defined herein by their chemical structures and/or chemical names. Where a compound is referred to by both a chemical structure and a chemical name, and the chemical structure and chemical name conflict, the chemical structure is determinative of the compound's identity.
  • The compounds described herein can exist in free form, or, where appropriate, as salts. Those salts that are pharmaceutically acceptable are of particular interest since they are useful in administering the compounds described above for medical purposes. Salts that are not pharmaceutically acceptable are useful in manufacturing processes, for isolation and purification purposes, and in some instances, for use in separating stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention or intermediates thereof
  • As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to salts of a compound, which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in humans and lower animals without undue side effects, such as, toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19, incorporated herein by reference. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds described herein include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds.
  • Where the compound described herein contains a basic group, or a sufficiently basic bioisostere, acid addition salts can be prepared by 1) reacting the purified compound in its free-base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid and 2) isolating the salt thus formed. In practice, acid addition salts might be a more convenient form for use and use of the salt amounts to use of the free basic form.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, non-toxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, glycolate, gluconate, glycolate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, palmoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, salicylate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like.
  • Where the compound described herein contains a carboxy group or a sufficiently acidic bioisostere, base addition salts can be prepared by 1) reacting the purified compound in its acid form with a suitable organic or inorganic base and 2) isolating the salt thus formed. In practice, use of the base addition salt might be more convenient and use of the salt form inherently amounts to use of the free acid form. Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal (e.g., sodium, lithium, and potassium), alkaline earth metal (e.g., magnesium and calcium), ammonium and N+(C1-4alkyl)4 salts. This invention also envisions the quaternization of any basic nitrogen-containing groups of the compounds disclosed herein. Water or oil-soluble or dispersible products may be obtained by such quaternization.
  • Basic addition salts include pharmaceutically acceptable metal and amine salts. Suitable metal salts include the sodium, potassium, calcium, barium, zinc, magnesium, and aluminium. The sodium and potassium salts are usually preferred. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, lower alkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate. Suitable inorganic base addition salts are prepared from metal bases which include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, aluminium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, zinc hydroxide and the like. Suitable amine base addition salts are prepared from amines which are frequently used in medicinal chemistry because of their low toxicity and acceptability for medical use Ammonia, ethylenediamine, N-methyl-glucamine, lysine, arginine, ornithine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, dietanolamine, procaine, N-benzylphenethylamine, diethylamine, piperazine, tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, triethylamine, dibenzylamine, ephenamine, dehydroabietylamine, N-ethylpiperidine, benzylamine, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, ethylamine, basic amino acids, dicyclohexylamine and the like.
  • Other acids and bases, while not in themselves pharmaceutically acceptable, may be employed in the preparation of salts useful as intermediates in obtaining the compounds described herein and their pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base addition salts.
  • It should be understood that this invention includes mixtures/combinations of different pharmaceutically acceptable salts and also mixtures/combinations of compounds in free form and pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • In addition to the compounds described herein, the methods of the invention can be employed for preparing pharmaceutically acceptable solvates (e.g., hydrates) and clathrates of these compounds.
  • As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,” is a solvate formed from the association of one or more pharmaceutically acceptable solvent molecules to one of the compounds described herein. The term solvate includes hydrates (e.g., hemihydrate, monohydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate, tetrahydrate, and the like).
  • As used herein, the term “hydrate” means a compound described herein or a salt thereof that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.
  • As used herein, he term “clathrate” means a compound described herein or a salt thereof in the form of a crystal lattice that contains spaces (e.g., channels) that have a guest molecule (e.g., a solvent or water) trapped within.
  • In addition to the compounds described herein, the methods of the invention can be employed for preparing pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives or prodrugs of these compounds.
  • A “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative or prodrug” includes any pharmaceutically acceptable ester, salt of an ester, or other derivative or salt thereof, of a compound described herein, which, upon administration to a recipient, is capable of providing, either directly or indirectly, a compound described herein or an inhibitorily active metabolite or residue thereof. Particularly favoured derivatives or prodrugs are those that increase the bioavailability of the compounds when such compounds are administered to a patient (e.g., by allowing an orally administered compound to be more readily absorbed into the blood) or which enhance delivery of the parent compound to a biological compartment (e.g., the brain or lymphatic system) relative to the parent species.
  • As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term “prodrug” means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide a compound described herein. Prodrugs may become active upon such reaction under biological conditions, or they may have activity in their unreacted forms. Examples of prodrugs contemplated in this invention include, but are not limited to, analogs or derivatives of compounds of the invention that comprise biohydrolyzable moieties such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues. Other examples of prodrugs include derivatives of compounds described herein that comprise —NO, —NO2, —ONO, or —ONO2 moieties. Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by BURGER'S MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY AND DRUG DISCOVERY (1995) 172-178, 949-982 (Manfred E. Wolff ed., 5th ed).
  • A “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative” is an adduct or derivative which, upon administration to a patient in need, is capable of providing, directly or indirectly, a compound as otherwise described herein, or a metabolite or residue thereof. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives include, but are not limited to, esters and salts of such esters.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs of the compounds described above include, without limitation, esters, amino acid esters, phosphate esters, metal salts and sulfonate esters.
  • The compounds described above are useful as protein kinase inhibitors, such as Plk (Plk1, Plk2, Plk3, and/or Plk4) inhibitors. Thus, these compounds can inhibit the activity of such protein kinase(s) in a patient. Generally, inhibiting such protein kinase activity can treat or prevent a condition selected from autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, proliferative and hyperproliferative diseases, immunologically-mediated diseases, bone diseases, metabolic diseases, neurological and neurodegenerative diseases, cardiovascular diseases, hormone related diseases, allergies, asthma, and Alzheimer's disease.
  • Particularly, the compounds described above are useful for the treatment of diseases, disorders, and conditions characterized by excessive or abonormal cell proliferation. Such diseases include a proliferative or hyperproliferative disease, and a neurodegenerative disease. Examples of proliferative and hyperproliferative diseases include, without limitation, cancer.
  • The term “cancer” includes, but is not limited to, the following cancers: breast; ovary; cervix; prostate; testis, genitourinary tract; esophagus; larynx, glioblastoma; neuroblastoma; stomach; skin, keratoacanthoma; lung, epidermoid carcinoma, large cell carcinoma, small cell carcinoma, lung adenocarcinoma; bone; colon; colorectal; adenoma; pancreas, adenocarcinoma; thyroid, follicular carcinoma, undifferentiated carcinoma, papillary carcinoma; seminoma; melanoma; sarcoma; bladder carcinoma; liver carcinoma and biliary passages; kidney carcinoma; myeloid disorders; lymphoid disorders, Hodgkin's, hairy cells; buccal cavity and pharynx (oral), lip, tongue, mouth, pharynx; small intestine; colon-rectum, large intestine, rectum; brain and central nervous system; chronic myeloid leukemia (CML), and leukemia. The term “cancer” includes, but is not limited to, the following cancers: myeloma, lymphoma, or a cancer selected from gastric, renal, or and the following cancers: head and neck, oropharangeal, non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), endometrial, hepatocarcinoma, Non-Hodgkins lymphoma, and pulmonary.
  • The term “cancer” also includes, but is not limited to, the following cancers: epidermoid Oral: buccal cavity, lip, tongue, mouth, pharynx; Cardiac: sarcoma (angiosarcoma, fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, liposarcoma), myxoma, rhabdomyoma, fibroma, lipoma and teratoma; Lung: bronchogenic carcinoma (squamous cell or epidermoid, undifferentiated small cell, undifferentiated large cell, adenocarcinoma), alveolar (bronchiolar) carcinoma, bronchial adenoma, sarcoma, lymphoma, chondromatous hamartoma, mesothelioma; Gastrointestinal: esophagus (squamous cell carcinoma, larynx, adenocarcinoma, leiomyosarcoma, lymphoma), stomach (carcinoma, lymphoma, leiomyosarcoma), pancreas (ductal adenocarcinoma, insulinoma, glucagonoma, gastrinoma, carcinoid tumors, vipoma), small bowel or small intestines (adenocarcinoma, lymphoma, carcinoid tumors, Karposi's sarcoma, leiomyoma, hemangioma, lipoma, neurofibroma, fibroma), large bowel or large intestines (adenocarcinoma, tubular adenoma, villous adenoma, hamartoma, leiomyoma), colon, colon-rectum, colorectal; rectum, Genitourinary tract: kidney (adenocarcinoma, Wilm's tumor [nephroblastoma], lymphoma, leukemia), bladder and urethra (squamous cell carcinoma, transitional cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma), prostate (adenocarcinoma, sarcoma), testis (seminoma, teratoma, embryonal carcinoma, teratocarcinoma, choriocarcinoma, sarcoma, interstitial cell carcinoma, fibroma, fibroadenoma, adenomatoid tumors, lipoma); Liver: hepatoma (hepatocellular carcinoma), cholangiocarcinoma, hepatoblastoma, angiosarcoma, hepatocellular adenoma, hemangioma, biliary passages; Bone: osteogenic sarcoma (osteosarcoma), fibrosarcoma, malignant fibrous histiocytoma, chondrosarcoma, Ewing's sarcoma, malignant lymphoma (reticulum cell sarcoma), multiple myeloma, malignant giant cell tumor chordoma, osteochronfroma (osteocartilaginous exostoses), benign chondroma, chondroblastoma, chondromyxofibroma, osteoid osteoma and giant cell tumors; Nervous system: skull (osteoma, hemangioma, granuloma, xanthoma, osteitis deformans), meninges (meningioma, meningiosarcoma, gliomatosis), brain (astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, glioma, ependymoma, germinoma [pinealoma], glioblastoma multiform, oligodendroglioma, schwannoma, retinoblastoma, congenital tumors), spinal cord neurofibroma, meningioma, glioma, sarcoma); Gynecological: uterus (endometrial carcinoma), cervix (cervical carcinoma, pre-tumor cervical dysplasia), ovaries (ovarian carcinoma [serous cystadenocarcinoma, mucinous cystadenocarcinoma, unclassified carcinoma], granulosa-thecal cell tumors, Sertoli-Leydig cell tumors, dysgerminoma, malignant teratoma), vulva (squamous cell carcinoma, intraepithelial carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, fibrosarcoma, melanoma), vagina (clear cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, botryoid sarcoma (embryonal rhabdomyosarcoma), fallopian tubes (carcinoma), breast; Hematologic: blood (myeloid leukemia [acute and chronic], acute lymphoblastic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, myeloproliferative diseases, multiple myeloma, myelodysplastic syndrome), Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma [malignant lymphoma] hairy cell; lymphoid disorders; Skin: malignant melanoma, basal cell carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, Karposi's sarcoma, keratoacanthoma, moles dysplastic nevi, lipoma, angioma, dermatofibroma, keloids, psoriasis, Thyroid gland: papillary thyroid carcinoma, follicular thyroid carcinoma; medullary thyroid carcinoma, undifferentiated thyroid cancer, multiple endocrine neoplasia type 2A, multiple endocrine neoplasia type 2B, familial medullary thyroid cancer, pheochromocytoma, paraganglioma; and Adrenal glands: neuroblastoma. Thus, the term “cancerous cell” as provided herein, includes a cell afflicted by any one of the above-identified conditions.
  • More particularly, the compounds described above are useful for treating cancer, such as colorectal, thyroid, breast, and lung cancer; and myeloproliferative disorders, such as polycythemia vera, thrombocythemia, myeloid metaplasia with myelofibrosis, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelomonocytic leukemia, hypereosinophilic syndrome, juvenile myelomonocytic leukemia, and systemic mast cell disease. Specific examples of diseases and conditions where the compounds described herein and their compositions are useful include hematopoietic disorders, in particular, acute-myelogenous leukemia (AML), chronic-myelogenous leukemia (CML), acute-promyelocytic leukemia (APL), and acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL). Examples of neurodegenerative diseases include, without limitation, Alzheimer's disease.
  • The compounds described above can be particularly useful for treating a protein-kinase mediated condition, such as a Plk-mediated disease. The term “protein kinase-mediated condition,” as used herein, means any disease or other deleterious condition in which a protein kinase plays a role. Such conditions include, without limitation, autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, proliferative and hyperproliferative diseases, immunologically-mediated diseases, bone diseases, metabolic diseases, neurological and neurodegenerative diseases, cardiovascular diseases, hormone related diseases, allergies, asthma, and Alzheimer's disease. The term “Plk-mediated condition”, as used herein means any disease or other deleterious condition in which Plk plays a role. Such conditions include, without limitation, a proliferative or hyperproliferative disease, or a neurodegenerative disease.
  • As used herein, a “patient” means an animal, preferably a human.
  • An “effective amount” of a compound for treating or preventing a protein kinase-mediated disease/condition (e.g., a Plk-mediated disease/condition) is the amount effective in order to treat said disease/condition. The compounds described above may be administered using any amount and any route of administration effective for treating or lessening the severity of said disease. For example, the compounds can be administered in a dosage of between 0.01-100 mg/kg body weight/day.
  • It should also be understood that a specific dosage and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, and the judgment of the treating physician and the severity of the particular disease being treated. The amount of the compound will also depend upon the particular compound in the composition.
  • Depending upon the particular protein kinase-mediated conditions to be treated or prevented, additional drugs, which are normally administered to treat or prevent that condition, may be administered together with the protease inhibitors described herein. For example, chemotherapeutic agents or other anti-proliferative agents may be combined with the protein kinase inhibitors of this invention to treat proliferative diseases.
  • Those additional agents may be administered separately, as part of a multiple dosage regimen, from the protein kinase inhibitor-containing compound or composition. Alternatively, those agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with the protein kinase inhibitor in a single composition.
  • Examples of known chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, Gleevec™, adriamycin, dexamethasone, vincristine, cyclophosphamide, fluorouracil, topotecan, taxol, interferons, and platinum derivatives. Other examples of agents the inhibitors of this invention may also be combined with include, without limitation: treatments for Alzheimer's Disease such as Aricept® and Excelon®; treatments for Parkinson's Disease such as L-DOPA/carbidopa, entacapone, ropinrole, pramipexole, bromocriptine, pergolide, trihexephendyl, and amantadine; agents for treating Multiple Sclerosis (MS) such as beta interferon (e.g., Avonex® and Rebif®), Copaxone®, and mitoxantrone; treatments for asthma such as albuterol and Singulair®; agents for treating schizophrenia such as zyprexa, risperdal, seroquel, and haloperidol; anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive agents such as cyclosporin, tacrolimus, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, interferons, corticosteroids, cyclophophamide, azathioprine, and sulfasalazine; neurotrophic factors such as acetylcholinesterase inhibitors, MAO inhibitors, interferons, anti-convulsants, ion channel blockers, riluzole, and anti-Parkinsonian agents; agents for treating cardiovascular disease such as beta-blockers, ACE inhibitors, diuretics, nitrates, calcium channel blockers, and statins; agents for treating liver disease such as corticosteroids, cholestyramine, interferons, and anti-viral agents; agents for treating blood disorders such as corticosteroids, anti-leukemic agents, and growth factors; and agents for treating immunodeficiency disorders such as gamma globulin.
  • As inhibitors of protein kinases, the compounds described above are also useful in biological samples. For example, the compounds are useful in inhibiting protein kinase activity in a biological sample. The term “biological sample”, as used herein, means an in vitro or an ex vivo sample, including, without limitation, cell cultures or extracts thereof; biopsied material obtained from a mammal or extracts thereof; and blood, saliva, urine, feces, semen, tears, or other body fluids or extracts thereof
  • Inhibition of protein kinase activity in a biological sample is useful for a variety of purposes that are known to one of skill in the art. Examples of such purposes include, but are not limited to, blood transfusion, organ-transplantation, and biological specimen storage.
  • The compounds described above are also useful the study of protein kinases in biological and pathological phenomena; the study of intracellular signal transduction pathways mediated by such protein kinases; and the comparative evaluation of new protein kinase inhibitors. Examples of such uses include, but are not limited to, biological assays such as enzyme assays and cell-based assays.
  • The activity of the compounds as protein kinase inhibitors may be assayed in vitro, in vivo or in a cell line. In vitro assays include assays that determine inhibition of either the kinase activity or ATPase activity of the activated kinase. Alternate in vitro assays quantitate the ability of the inhibitor to bind to the protein kinase and may be measured either by radiolabelling the inhibitor prior to binding, isolating the inhibitor/kinase complex and determining the amount of radiolabel bound, or by running a competition experiment where new inhibitors are incubated with the kinase bound to known radioligands. Protein kinase inhibition assays are known in the art. For example, detailed conditions for Plk1, Plk2, Plk3, and Plk4 are set forth in US 2008/0167289 and US 2009/0062292.
  • In treating or preventing one or more conditions/diseases described above, the compounds described above can be formulated in pharmaceutically acceptable formulations that optionally further comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant or vehicle.
  • As described herein, the pharmaceutically acceptable compositions comprise a compound described above in an effective amount, and additionally comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle, which includes any and all solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicle, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980) discloses various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutically acceptable compositions and known techniques for the preparation thereof. Except insofar as any conventional carrier medium is incompatible with the compounds of the invention, such as by producing any undesirable biological effect or otherwise interacting in a deleterious manner with any other component(s) of the pharmaceutically acceptable composition, its use is contemplated to be within the scope of this invention. As used herein, the phrase “side effects” encompasses unwanted and adverse effects of a therapy (e.g., a prophylactic or therapeutic agent). Side effects are always unwanted, but unwanted effects are not necessarily adverse. An adverse effect from a therapy (e.g., prophylactic or therapeutic agent) might be harmful or uncomfortable or risky.
  • A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may contain inert ingredients which do not unduly inhibit the biological activity of the compounds. The pharmaceutically acceptable carriers should be biocompatible, e.g., non-toxic, non-inflammatory, non-immunogenic or devoid of other undesired reactions or side-effects upon the administration to a subject. Standard pharmaceutical formulation techniques can be employed.
  • Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins (such as human serum albumin), buffer substances (such as twin 80, phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, or potassium sorbate), partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes (such as protamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, or zinc salts), colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, wool fat, sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil; safflower oil; sesame oil; olive oil; corn oil and soybean oil; glycols; such a propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non-toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, releasing agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator.
  • The compounds described above, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof can be administered to humans and other animals orally, rectally, parenterally, intracisternally, intravaginally, intraperitoneally, topically (as by powders, ointments, or drops), bucally, as an oral or nasal spray, or the like, depending on the severity of the infection being treated. The term “parenteral” as used herein includes, but is not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular, intra-synovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrahepatic, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques. Specifically, the compositions are administered orally, intraperitoneally or intravenously.
  • Any orally acceptable dosage form including, but not limited to, capsules, tablets, aqueous suspensions or solutions, can be used for the oral administration. In the case of tablets for oral use, carriers commonly used include, but are not limited to, lactose and corn starch. Lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, are also typically added. For oral administration in a capsule form, useful diluents include lactose and dried cornstarch. When aqueous suspensions are required for oral use, the active ingredient is combined with emulsifying and suspending agents. If desired, certain sweetening, flavoring or coloring agents may also be added.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds (the compounds described above), the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polethylene glycols and the like.
  • The active compounds can also be in microencapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch. Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • Injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • Sterile injectable forms may be aqueous or oleaginous suspension. These suspensions may be formulated according to techniques known in the art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose, any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or di-glycerides. Fatty acids, such as oleic acid and its glyceride derivatives are useful in the preparation of injectables, as are natural pharmaceutically-acceptable oils, such as olive oil or castor oil, especially in their polyoxyethylated versions. These oil solutions or suspensions may also contain a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant, such as carboxymethyl cellulose or similar dispersing agents which are commonly used in the formulation of pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms including emulsions and suspensions. Other commonly used surfactants, such as Tweens, Spans and other emulsifying agents or bioavailability enhancers which are commonly used in the manufacture of pharmaceutically acceptable solid, liquid, or other dosage forms may also be used for the purposes of formulation.
  • In order to prolong the effect of the active compounds administered, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the compound from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the compound then depends upon its rate of dissolution that, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered compound form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the compound in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the compound in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of compound to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of compound release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the compound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are specifically suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the active compound with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, eardrops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Additionally, transdermal patches, which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body, can also be used. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • Alternatively, the compounds described above and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof may also be administered by nasal aerosol or inhalation. Such compositions are prepared according to techniques well-known in the art of pharmaceutical formulation and may be prepared as solutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bioavailability, fluorocarbons, and/or other conventional solubilizing or dispersing agents.
  • The compounds described above and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof can be formulated in unit dosage form. The term “unit dosage form” refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosage for subjects undergoing treatment, with each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, optionally in association with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier. The unit dosage form can be for a single daily dose or one of multiple daily doses (e.g., about 1 to 4 or more times per day). When multiple daily doses are used, the unit dosage form can be the same or different for each dose. The amount of the active compound in a unit dosage form will vary depending upon, for example, the host treated, and the particular mode of administration, for example, from 0.01 mg/kg body weight/day to 100 mg/kg body weight/day.
    • EXEMPLIFICATION Example 1 Preparation of (R)-7-chloro-5-cyclopentyl-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f]pteridine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00043
    • Method A: tert-butyl N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]carbamate
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00044
  • (2R)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)butanoic acid (5 g, 24.60 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (500 mL) and cooled to 0° C. CDI (4.188 g, 25.83 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for 60 minutes. Formic hydrazine (1.477 g, 24.60 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred at 0° C. for 45 minutes then allowed to reach ambient temperature overnight. The reaction was cooled to 0° C. and treated with PS—PPh3 (22.88 g, 49.20 mmol) and CBr4 (16.32 g, 49.20 mmol) The reaction was allowed to warm slowly to ambient temperature over 2 hours, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (25 to 50% EtOAc/Petrol) to give the sub-title compound as a colourless oil (2.30 g, 41%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, DMSO) d 0.88 (t, 3H), 1.27-1.39 (2×s, 9H), 1.75-1.87 (m, 2H), 4.71 (dd, 1H), 7.62 (d, 1H), 9.17 (s, 1H) MS ES(+) 228.
    • Method B: (1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propan-1-amine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00045
  • tert-butyl N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]carbamate (2.255 g, 9.923 mmol) was dissolved in DCM (17.76 mL) at 0° C. and TFA (17.76 mL) was added. The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 4.5 hours then concentrated under high vacuum. The residue was azeotroped with DCM (×2). The resultant oil was dissolved in a mixture of THF (40 ml) and DCM (20 ml) then treated with MP-carbonate (15 g, 199.9 mmol). The reaction was stirred gently for 1 hour then filtered. The resin was stirred with further portions DCM (2×25 ml) and filtered. The combined filtrates were filtered and concentrated to give the sub-title compound as a colourless oil (908 mg, 72%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, DMSO) d 0.86 (3H, t), 1.61-1.80 (2H, m), 2.23 (2H, br hump), 3.98 (1H, m), 9.15 (1H, s); MS ES (+) 128.
    • Method C: N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]cyclopentanamine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00046
  • (1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propan-1-amine (610 mg, 4.798 mmol) in THF (6.972 mL) was treated with cyclopentanone (407.6 mg, 428.6 μL, 4.846 mmol) then acetic acid (288.1 mg, 272.8 μL, 4.798 mmol). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 20 minutes then treated with sodium triacetoxyborohydride (1.485 g, 7.005 mmol). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 5 hours then basified with aqueous NaHCO3. The mixture was extracted with DCM (×10), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (50% EtOAc/petrol) to give the sub-title compound as a colourless solid (694 mg, 74%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, CDCl3) d 0.81 (3H, t), 1.10-1.87 (10H, m), 2.85 (1H, m), 3.95 (1H, t), 8.33 (1H, s); MS ES (+) 196.
    • Method D: 2-chloro-N-cyclopentyl-5-nitro-N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]pyrimidin-4-amine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00047
  • 17N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]cyclopentanamine (199 mg, 1.019 mmol) in anhydrous THF (3.980 mL) was treated with NaHCO3 (342.4 mg, 4.076 mmol) then 2,4-dichloro-5-nitro-pyrimidine (197.7 mg, 1.019 mmol). The reaction was stirred overnight at ambient temperature. The reaction was further stirred at 45° C. for 10 hours, diluted with EtOAc/Brine and extracted EtOAc (×3). The combined organic extracts were dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography (30% EtOAc/petrol) to give the sub-title compound as a pale yellow oil (107 mg, 30%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, CDCl3) d 1.03 (3H, t), 1.45-2.80 (10H, m), 3.55 (1H, m), 4.39 (1H, m), 8.31 (1H, s), 8.60 (1H, s); MS ES (+) 353.1.
    • Method E: (R)-7-chloro-5-cyclopentyl-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f]pteridine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00048
  • 2-chloro-N-cyclopentyl-5-nitro-N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]pyrimidin-4-amine (37 mg, 0.1049 mmol) in methanol (1.850 mL) was treated with zinc (116.6 mg, 16.35 μL, 1.783 mmol) and then dropwise acetic acid (245.7 mg, 232.7 μL, 4.091 mmol). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 10 minutes. The reaction was filtered and the residual zinc washed with methanol. The combined filtrates were concentrated and re-dissolved in acetic acid (2 mL) and stirred at 70° C. for 1 hour. The reaction was filtered and precipitate washed with methanol. The filtrates were concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, taken into 10% MeOH/DCM and passed through a short silica gel column. The residue was trituated with ether and the title compound isolated by filtration as a pale brown solid (21 mg, 66%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, DMSO) d 0.75 (3H, t), 1.50-1.64 (2H, m), 1.80-2.08 (8H, m), 4.22-4.33 (1H, m), 5.28-5.35 (1H, m), 8.68 (1H, s), 9.35 (1H, s); MS ES (+) 305.7.
    • Example 2 Preparation of (R)-7-chloro-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f]pteridine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00049
    • 2-chloro-N-cyclopentyl-5-nitro-N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]pyrimidin-4-amine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00050
  • Prepared by a method similar to Method D, using (1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propan-1-amine and 2,4-dichloro-5-nitro-pyrimidine. Title compound was obtained as a white solid (70%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, CDCl3) d 1.10 (3H, dt), 2.10-2.33 (2H, m), 5.81 (1H, m), 8.46 (1H, d), 8.82 (1H, d), 9.14 (1H, d); MS ES (+) 285.0, ES (−) 283.0.
    • (R)-7-chloro-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f]pteridine
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00051
  • Prepared by a method similar to Method E, using 2-chloro-N-cyclopentyl-5-nitro-N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]pyrimidin-4-amine. Title compound was obtained as a white solid (70%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, DMSO) d 0.85-0.90 (3H, m), 1.92-1.98 (2H, m), 5.12 (1H, m), 8.62 (1H, s), 9.01 (1H, s), 9.23 (1H, s); MS ES (+) 236.9, ES (−) 235.0.
    • Example 3 Preparation of (R)-methyl 4-(5-cyclopentyl-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-f]pteridin-7-ylamino)-3-methoxybenzoate
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00052
    • Method F: (R)-methyl 4-(4-((1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl)(cyclopentypamino)-5-nitropyrimidin-2-ylamino)-3-methoxybenzoate
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00053
  • 2-chloro-N-cyclopentyl-5-nitro-N-[(1R)-1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl]pyrimidin-4-amine (61.5 mg, 0.1743 mmol) and methyl 4-amino-3-methoxy benzoate (37.9 mg, 0.2092 mmol) in 4-methylpentan-2-ol (600 L) were treated with DIPEA (33.8 mg, 45.6 mL, 0.2614 mmol) and the reaction mixture stirred at 140° C. for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography (50% EtOAc/Petrol) to give the sub-title compound as a brown oil (42 mg, 48%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, DMSO) d 0.75-0.89 (3H, m), 1.15-1.75 (8H, m), 2.24-2.34 (1H, m), 2.40-2.51 (1H, m), 2.61-2.72 (1H, m), 3.55-3.63 (1H, m), 3.84 (3H, s), 3.89 (3H, s), 7.44 (1H, s), 7.55-7.65 (2H, m), 7.75-8.03 (1H, br s), 8.12 (1H, s), 8.77 (1H, s); MS ES(+) 498.1.
    • Method G: (R)-methyl 4-(5-cyclopentyl-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-f]pteridin-7-ylamino)-3-methoxybenzoate
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00054
  • Zinc (22.1 mg, 0.3377 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of (R)-methyl 4-(4-((1-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)propyl)(cyclopentyl)amino)-5-nitropyrimidin-2-ylamino)-3-methoxybenzoate (12 mg, 0.02412 mmol) in methanol (1 mL). Glacial acetic acid (56.49 mg, 53.49 L, 0.9407 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 90 minutes. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue redissolved in glacial acetic acid (1 mL) and the reaction mixture heated at 70° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue dissolved in DCM. The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (10% MeOH/DCM) to give the title compound as a brown solid (7 mg, 65%); 1H NMR (400.0 MHz, DMSO) d 0.76-0.80 (3H, t), 1.20-2.20 (10H, m), 3.91 (3H, s), 3.84 (3H, s), 4.49-4.60 (1H, m), 5.01-5.10 (1H, m), 7.48 (1H, s), 7.63 (1H, s), 7.80 (1H, s), 8.17 (1H, s), 8.38-8.51 (2H, m); MS ES(+) 450.2.
    • Method H: 4-((R)-5-cyclopentyl-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f]pteridin-7-ylamino)-3-methoxy-N-methylbenzamide
  • Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00055
  • To a solution of (R)-7-chloro-5-cyclopentyl-4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f]pteridine (80 mg, 0.263 mmol) in a mixture ethanol/water (¼, 5 mL) were added 4-amino-3-methoxy-N-methylbenzamide (72 mg, 0.394 mmol) followed by a catalytic amount of concentrated HCl (0.04 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 90° C. for 24 hours, then cooled to room temperature and basified with saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, the organic layer was dried (MgSO4) and the residue purified by flash chromatography to give the title compound as a colourless solid (92 mg, 78% yield); 1H NMR (DMSO D6) 0.75 (3H, t), 1.43-1.60 (4H, m), 1.80-2.07 (6H, m), 2.80 (3H, d), 3.88 (3H, s), 4.19 (1H, m), 5.38 (1H, m), 7.50 (1H, d), 7.59 (1H, s), 7.83 (1H, d), 8.47 (1H, m), 8.67 (1H, s), 9.31 (1H, s), 9.40 (1H, br s); LC/MS M+1 (obs.) 449.3.
  • All references provided herein are incorporated herein in its entirety by reference. As used herein, all abbreviations, symbols and conventions are consistent with those used in the contemporary scientific literature. See, e.g., Janet S. Dodd, ed., The ACS Style Guide: A Manual for Authors and Editors, 2nd Ed., Washington, D.C.: American Chemical Society, 1997.
  • It is to be understood that while the invention has been described in conjunction with the detailed description thereof, the foregoing description is intended to illustrate and not limit the scope of the invention, which is defined by the scope of the appended claims. Other aspects, advantages, and modifications are within the scope of the following claims.

Claims (17)

1-36. (canceled)
37. A method of preparing a compound represented by Structural Formula (2d):
Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00056
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
R1 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R1 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J1;
each R2, R3, R4, and R5 is independently —H, halogen, cyano, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-10 cycloaliphatic, wherein each of said aliphatic and cycloaliphatic groups represented by R2, R3, R4, and R5, respectively, is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J2, J3, J4, and J5, respectively;
optionally, R2 and R3, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
optionally, R3 and R4, together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
optionally, R4 and R5, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
R6 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl groups represented by R6 is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of J6;
R7 is —H, or a C1-6 aliphatic or C3-8 cycloaliphatic group optionally substituted with one or more instanced of JA, or, optionally R7, together with R1 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring that is optionally being substituted with one or more instances of JB;
R8 is —H, C1-6 aliphatic, or C3-8 cycloaliphatic, wherein said aliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA, and wherein said cycloaliphatic group is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
each J1 is independently T or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T;
each of J2, J3, J4, J5, and J6 is independently M, or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M;
each T is independently halogen, oxo, —NO2, —CN, Q1, —Z1—H, or —Z2-Q2;
each Z1 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(═NR)—, —C(═NOR)—, and —SO2N(R)—;
each Z2 is independently a unit consisting of one or more groups independently selected from the group consisting of —NR—, —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —C(═NR)—, —C(═NOR)—, —S(O)—, and —S(O)2—;
each Q1 is independently C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, wherein each Q1 is independently and optionally substituted with one or more instances of JQ;
each Q2 is independently C1-6 aliphatic, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, or Q1-Q1, each of which is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of JQ; or each Q2, together with R and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB; and
each JQ is independently M or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of M;
each M is independently halogen, oxo, —NO2, —CN, —OR′, —SR′, —N(R′)2, —COR′, —CO2R′, —CONR′2, —OCOR″, —OCON(R′)2, —NRCOR′, —NRCO2R′, —NRCON(R′)2, —S(O)R″, —SO2R″, —SO2N(R′)2, —NRSO2R″, —NRSO2N(R′)2, C3-10 cycloaliphatic, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each of said cycloaliphatic, heterocyclyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups represented by M is optionally and independently substituted with one or more instances of JB;
each R is independently —H or C1-6 aliphatic, or each R, together with Q2 and the nitrogen atom to which it is attached, optionally forms a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
each R′ is independently —H or C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA; or two R′ groups, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bound, form a 4-7 membered heterocyclic ring optionally substituted with one or more instances of JB;
each R″ is independently C1-4 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA;
each JA is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), C3-7 cycloalkyl, and C3-7 cyclo(haloalkyl);
each JB is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), —O(C1-C4 alkyl), and C1-C4 aliphatic that is optionally substituted with one or more instances of JA; and
q is 0 or 1;
comprising the step of:
a) cyclizing a compound represented by Structural Formula (1a):
Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00057
under suitable reductive cyclisation conditions to form a compound represented by Structural Formula (1b):
Figure US20140187774A1-20140703-C00058
wherein -LG1 is a suitable leaving group; and
b) replacing the leaving group -LG1 with NR1R7 by reacting compound (1b) with HNR1R7 to form the compound of Structural Formula (2d).
38. The method of claim 37, wherein R1 is optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C6-10 aryl, or optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
39. The method of claim 38, wherein R2 is —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic.
40. The method of claim 39, wherein R6 is optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic, optionally substituted 4-7 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl.
41. The method of claim 40, wherein each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, halogen, optionally substituted C1-6 aliphatic, or optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic; or optionally R2 and R3, R3 and R4, and R4 and R5, respectively, together with the atom to which they are bound, independently form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloaliphatic ring.
42. The method of claim 41, wherein LG1 is halogen.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein LG1 is —Cl.
44. The method of claim 37, wherein R1 is C1-4 alkyl substituted with Q1 and optionally further substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, oxo, —CN, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-C4 alkyl), —N(C1-C4 alkyl)2, —OCO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO(C1-C4 alkyl), —CO2H, —CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), and —O(C1-C4 alkyl).
45. The method of claim 44, wherein R1 is C6-10 aryl or 5-6 membered heteroaryl, each optionally and independently substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, Q1, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)C(O)N(R)H, —SO2N(R)H, —N(R)SO2N(R)H, —S(O)2Q2, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —SQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2, —SO2N(R)Q2, —N(R)SO2Q2, or —N(R)SO2N(R)Q2.
46. The method of claim 45, wherein each of R2, R3, R4 and R5 is independently —H, or optionally substituted C1-6 alkyl; or optionally R2 and R3, together with the atom to which they are bound, form an optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl ring.
47. The method of claim 46, wherein:
i) R2 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; R3 is C1-3 alkyl; R4 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; and R5 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; or
ii) R2 and R3 together with the atom to which they are bound form a C3-7 cycloalkyl ring; R4 is —H or C1-3 alkyl; and R5 is —H or C1-3 alkyl.
48. The method of claim 47, wherein R4 and R5 are both —H.
49. The method of claim 44, wherein R1 is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of T and C1-6 aliphatic optionally substituted with one or more instances of T; and wherein each T is halogen, cyano, —N(R)H, —OH, —CO2H, —C(O)N(R)H, —OC(O)N(R)H, —N(R)Q2, —OQ2, —CO2Q2, —OC(O)Q2, —C(O)N(R)Q2, —N(R)C(O)Q2, —N(R)CO2Q2, —OC(O)N(R)Q2, —C(O)N(R)CO2Q2, or —N(R)C(O)N(R)Q2.
50. The compound of claim 49, wherein R2 is —H.
51. The method of claim 50, wherein R6 is optionally substituted C3-6 cycloalkyl.
52. The method of claim 37, wherein q is 0.
US14/100,952 2009-09-25 2013-12-09 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors Abandoned US20140187774A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/100,952 US20140187774A1 (en) 2009-09-25 2013-12-09 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US24576909P 2009-09-25 2009-09-25
PCT/US2010/050132 WO2011038185A2 (en) 2009-09-25 2010-09-24 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors
US13/424,736 US8637666B2 (en) 2009-09-25 2012-03-20 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors
US14/100,952 US20140187774A1 (en) 2009-09-25 2013-12-09 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/424,736 Continuation US8637666B2 (en) 2009-09-25 2012-03-20 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20140187774A1 true US20140187774A1 (en) 2014-07-03

Family

ID=43796499

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/424,736 Expired - Fee Related US8637666B2 (en) 2009-09-25 2012-03-20 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors
US14/100,952 Abandoned US20140187774A1 (en) 2009-09-25 2013-12-09 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/424,736 Expired - Fee Related US8637666B2 (en) 2009-09-25 2012-03-20 Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors

Country Status (15)

Country Link
US (2) US8637666B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2480553A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2013512860A (en)
KR (1) KR20120096474A (en)
CN (1) CN103492391A (en)
AU (1) AU2010298190A1 (en)
BR (1) BR112012006639A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2773827A1 (en)
IL (1) IL218791A0 (en)
MX (1) MX2012003476A (en)
NZ (1) NZ599342A (en)
RU (1) RU2012116526A (en)
SG (1) SG179207A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2011038185A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA201201978B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9758538B2 (en) 2015-07-15 2017-09-12 Pfizer Inc. Pyrimidine derivatives

Families Citing this family (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8940742B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2015-01-27 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
EP3052485B1 (en) 2013-10-04 2021-07-28 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
WO2015051241A1 (en) 2013-10-04 2015-04-09 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
EA201691872A1 (en) 2014-03-19 2017-04-28 Инфинити Фармасьютикалз, Инк. HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS FOR APPLICATION IN THE TREATMENT OF PI3K-GAMMA-MEDIATED DISORDERS
WO2016054491A1 (en) 2014-10-03 2016-04-07 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9840503B2 (en) 2015-05-11 2017-12-12 Incyte Corporation Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
WO2017027717A1 (en) 2015-08-12 2017-02-16 Incyte Corporation Bicyclic fused pyrimidine compounds as tam inhibitors
WO2017035366A1 (en) 2015-08-26 2017-03-02 Incyte Corporation Pyrrolopyrimidine derivatives as tam inhibitors
WO2017048702A1 (en) 2015-09-14 2017-03-23 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of isoquinolinone derivatives, process of making, compositions comprising, and methods of using the same
WO2017161116A1 (en) 2016-03-17 2017-09-21 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isotopologues of isoquinolinone and quinazolinone compounds and uses thereof as pi3k kinase inhibitors
PE20190175A1 (en) 2016-03-28 2019-02-01 Incyte Corp PYRROLOTRIAZINE COMPOUNDS AS TAM INHIBITORS
WO2017214269A1 (en) 2016-06-08 2017-12-14 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US10357493B2 (en) 2017-03-10 2019-07-23 Selenity Therapeutics (Bermuda), Ltd. Metalloenzyme inhibitor compounds
CN111386273B (en) 2017-09-27 2024-06-14 因赛特公司 Salts of pyrrolotriazine derivatives useful as TAM inhibitors
MX2021000127A (en) 2018-06-29 2021-03-29 Incyte Corp Formulations of an axl/mer inhibitor.
CN110511226B (en) * 2019-09-06 2021-07-09 西南交通大学 Compound or salt or solvate thereof, use thereof and pharmaceutical composition
CR20220325A (en) 2019-12-20 2022-08-19 Tenaya Therapeutics Inc FLUOROALKYL-OXADIAZOLE AND THEIR USES
CA3174539A1 (en) 2020-03-06 2021-09-10 Incyte Corporation Combination therapy comprising axl/mer and pd-1/pd-l1 inhibitors
IL308152A (en) 2021-05-04 2024-01-01 Tenaya Therapeutics Inc 2-fluoroalkyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-5-yl-thiazol, hdac6 inhibitors for use in the treatment of metabolic disease and hfpef
CN115322209B (en) * 2022-07-19 2023-06-20 湖北理工学院 Triadyncyclic compounds as DNA-PK inhibitors

Family Cites Families (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5638032B2 (en) 1972-08-31 1981-09-03
US3880855A (en) 1973-04-16 1975-04-29 Bristol Myers Co 5,6-DIHYDRO-11-H-pyrimido{8 4,5-b{9 {8 1,4{9 benzodiazepines
JPS51110202A (en) 1975-03-24 1976-09-29 Susumu Nojima Denwakyono hyojisochi
GB8927872D0 (en) 1989-12-08 1990-02-14 Beecham Group Plc Pharmaceuticals
ZA973884B (en) 1996-05-23 1998-11-06 Du Pont Merck Pharma Tetrahydropteridines and pyridylpiperazines for treatment of neurological disorders
US6184226B1 (en) 1998-08-28 2001-02-06 Scios Inc. Quinazoline derivatives as inhibitors of P-38 α
US7169778B2 (en) 1999-09-15 2007-01-30 Warner-Lambert Company Pteridinones as kinase inhibitors
CZ2002934A3 (en) 1999-09-17 2002-07-17 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Kinase inhibitors functioning as therapeutic agents
US7101869B2 (en) 1999-11-30 2006-09-05 Pfizer Inc. 2,4-diaminopyrimidine compounds useful as immunosuppressants
TR200201431T2 (en) 1999-11-30 2002-09-23 Pfizer Products Inc. 2,4-diaminopyrimidine compounds useful as immunosuppressants
WO2002076985A1 (en) 2001-03-23 2002-10-03 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of hyperproliferative diseases
US6806272B2 (en) 2001-09-04 2004-10-19 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Kg Dihydropteridinones, processes for preparing them and their use as pharmaceutical compositions
CN1551881A (en) 2001-09-04 2004-12-01 ���ָ��Ӣ��ķ�������Ϲ�˾ Novel dihydropteridones, processes for their preparation and use as pharmaceutical compositions
JP4560483B2 (en) 2002-10-03 2010-10-13 ターゲジェン インコーポレーティッド Angiogenic substances and methods for their use
MXPA05009068A (en) 2003-02-26 2005-10-19 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Dihydropteridinones, method for the production and use thereof in the form of drugs.
US6861422B2 (en) 2003-02-26 2005-03-01 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Dihydropteridinones, processes for preparing them and their use as pharmaceutical compositions
CA2528975A1 (en) 2003-06-10 2004-12-16 Pfizer Inc. Therapeutic combinations comprising pde inhibitors and vasopressin receptor antagonists for the treatment of dysmenorrhoea
GB0400700D0 (en) 2004-01-13 2004-02-18 Pfizer Ltd Compounds useful in therapy
GB0412874D0 (en) 2004-06-09 2004-07-14 Pfizer Ltd Novel pharmaceuticals
DE102004029784A1 (en) 2004-06-21 2006-01-05 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Novel 2-Benzylaminodihydropteridinones, process for their preparation and their use as medicaments
DE102004058337A1 (en) 2004-12-02 2006-06-14 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Process for the preparation of fused piperazin-2-one derivatives
TW200804389A (en) * 2006-02-14 2008-01-16 Vertex Pharma Dihydrodiazepines useful as inhibitors of protein kinases
AU2007238690B2 (en) 2006-04-12 2013-05-02 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated 4, 5-dihydro- [1, 2, 4] triazolo [4, 3-f] pteridines as protein kinase PLK1 inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative disorders
TW200808325A (en) * 2006-07-06 2008-02-16 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
JP2009542803A (en) 2006-07-12 2009-12-03 アストラゼネカ・アクチエボラーグ 3-oxoisoindoline-1-carboxamide derivatives as analgesics
NZ583061A (en) * 2007-08-15 2012-06-29 Vertex Pharma 4-(9-(3,3-difluorocyclopentyl)-5,7,7-trimethyl-6-oxo-6,7,8,9-tetrahydro-5h-pyrimido[4,5-b[1,4]diazepin-2-ylamino)-3-methoxybenzamide derivatives as inhibitors of the human protein kinases plk1 to plk4 for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US8026234B2 (en) * 2007-09-25 2011-09-27 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Polo-like kinase inhibitors
JP4941835B2 (en) 2007-09-28 2012-05-30 Ｔｏｔｏ株式会社 Cabinet and cabinet construction method
PL2610256T3 (en) 2007-09-28 2016-11-30 Pyrimidine derivatives as protein kinase inhibitors
WO2009067547A1 (en) 2007-11-19 2009-05-28 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Polo-like kinase inhibitors
US8598172B2 (en) 2007-12-04 2013-12-03 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Substituted dihydropteridin-6-one derivatives, process for their preparation and their use as kinase inhibitors
JP2011527667A (en) 2008-06-18 2011-11-04 武田薬品工業株式会社 Halo-substituted pyrimidodiazepine
MX2011000026A (en) * 2008-06-23 2011-02-24 Vertex Pharma Protein kinase inhibitors.
KR20110033239A (en) * 2008-06-23 2011-03-30 버텍스 파마슈티칼스 인코포레이티드 Protein kinase inhibitors
JP5035192B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2012-09-26 コニカミノルタアドバンストレイヤー株式会社 Drive mechanism, drive device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9758538B2 (en) 2015-07-15 2017-09-12 Pfizer Inc. Pyrimidine derivatives

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20120178926A1 (en) 2012-07-12
RU2012116526A (en) 2013-10-27
ZA201201978B (en) 2013-12-23
BR112012006639A2 (en) 2015-09-08
US8637666B2 (en) 2014-01-28
CA2773827A1 (en) 2011-03-31
EP2480553A2 (en) 2012-08-01
MX2012003476A (en) 2012-06-19
SG179207A1 (en) 2012-04-27
WO2011038185A2 (en) 2011-03-31
NZ599342A (en) 2014-04-30
CN103492391A (en) 2014-01-01
AU2010298190A1 (en) 2012-05-03
JP2013512860A (en) 2013-04-18
KR20120096474A (en) 2012-08-30
WO2011038185A3 (en) 2013-12-05
IL218791A0 (en) 2012-06-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8637666B2 (en) Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors
US8592577B2 (en) Methods for preparing pyrimidine derivatives useful as protein kinase inhibitors
US8461149B2 (en) Compounds useful as protein kinase inhibitors
US8252787B2 (en) Protein kinase inhibitors
US7763629B2 (en) Tetrahydropteridines useful as inhibitors of protein kinases
US8618106B2 (en) Protein kinase inhibitors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED, MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:CHARRIER, JEAN-DAMIEN;DURRANT, STEVEN;KAY, DAVID;REEL/FRAME:033007/0963

Effective date: 20120228

AS Assignment

Owner name: MACQUARIE US TRADING LLC, NEW YORK

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED;VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS (SAN DIEGO) LLC;REEL/FRAME:033292/0311

Effective date: 20140709

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS INCORPORATED, MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:MACQUARIE US TRADING LLC;REEL/FRAME:040357/0001

Effective date: 20161013

Owner name: VERTEX PHARMACEUTICALS (SAN DIEGO) LLC, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:MACQUARIE US TRADING LLC;REEL/FRAME:040357/0001

Effective date: 20161013

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务，不要输入任何密码和下载